Agilent 33210A Audio Analyzer

33210A users guide.
book Page 1 Wednesday, July 16, 2008 11:16 AM
User’s Guide
Publication Number 33210-90001 (order as 33210-90000 manual set)

Edition 1, August 2008
Copyright © 2008 Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Agilent 33210A
10 MHz Function /
Arbitrary Waveform Generator
33210A users guide.book Page 2 Wednesday, July 16, 2008 11:16 AM
Agilent 33210A at a Glance
The Agilent Technologies 33210A is a 10 MHz synthesized function

generator with built-in arbitrary waveform and pulse capabilities.
Its combination of bench-top and system features makes this function
generator a versatile solution for your testing requirements now and in
the future.
Convenient bench-top features
• Up to 10 standard waveforms
• Built-in 14-bit 50 MSa/s waveform capability
• Precise pulse waveform capabilities with adjustable edge time
• LCD display provides numeric and graphical views
• Easy-to-use knob and numeric keypad
• Instrument state storage with user-defined names
• Portable, ruggedized case with non-skid feet
Flexible system features
• Four optional downloadable 8K-point arbitrary waveform memories

(Option 002)
• GPIB (IEEE-488), USB, and LAN remote interfaces are standard
• LXI Class C Compliant
• SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) compatibility
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, this manual applies to all Serial Numbers.
2
The Front Panel at a Glance
1 Graph Mode/ Local Key 9 Manual Trigger Key (used for

2 On/Off Switch Sweep and Burst only)
3 Modulation/Sweep/Burst Keys 10 Output Enable/Disable Key
4 State Storage Menu Key 11 Knob
5 Utility Menu Key 12 Cursor Keys
6 Help Menu Key 13 Sync Connector
7 Menu Operation Softkeys 14 Output Connector
8 Waveform Selection Keys
Note: To get context-sensitive help on any front-panel key or menu softkey,

press and hold down that key.
3
The Front-Panel Display at a Glance
Menu Mode
Mode Trigger Output

Information Information Units Status
Numeric Display
Readout Icon
Softkey Labels
Graph Mode
To enter or exit the Graph Mode, press the key.
Parameter Parameter
Name Value
Signal
Ground
In Graph Mode, only one parameter label

is displayed for each key at one time.
4
Front-Panel Number Entry
You can enter numbers from the front-panel using one of two methods.
Use the knob and cursor keys to modify the displayed number.
1. Use the keys below the knob to move the cursor left or right.
2. Rotate the knob to change a digit (clockwise to increase).
Use the keypad to enter numbers and the softkeys to select units.
1. Key in a value as you would on a typical calculator.

2. Select a unit to enter the value.
5
The Rear Panel at a Glance
1 External 10 MHz Reference Input Terminal 5 USB Interface Connector

(Option 001 only). 6 LAN Interface Connector
2 Internal 10 MHz Reference Output Terminal 7 GPIB Interface Connector
(Option 001 only). 8 Chassis Ground
3 External Modulation Input Terminal
4 Input: External Trigger/Burst Gate
Output: Trigger Output
Use the menu to:

• Select the GPIB address (see chapter 2).
• Set the network parameters for the LAN interface (see chapter 2).
• Display the current network parameters (see chapter 2).
Note: The External and Internal 10 MHz Reference Terminals (1 and 2,

above) are present only if Option 001, External Timebase Reference, is
installed. Otherwise, the holes for these connectors are plugged.
WARNING For protection from electrical shock, the power cord ground must not be
defeated. If only a two-contact electrical outlet is available, connect the
instrument’s chassis ground screw (see above) to a good earth ground.
6
In This Book
Quick Start Chapter 1 prepares the function generator for use and
helps you get familiar with a few of its front-panel features.
Front-Panel Menu Operation Chapter 2 introduces you to the front-

panel menu and describes some of the function generator’s menu features.
Features and Functions Chapter 3 gives a detailed description of the

function generator’s capabilities and operation. You will find this chapter
useful whether you are operating the function generator from the front
panel or over the remote interface.
Remote Interface Reference Chapter 4 contains reference information

to help you program the function generator over the remote interface.
Error Messages Chapter 5 lists the error messages that may appear
as you are working with the function generator. Each listing contains
information to help you diagnose and solve the problem.
Application Programs Chapter 6 contains several remote interface

application programs to help you develop programs for your application.
Tutorial Chapter 7 discusses the fundamentals of signal generation

and modulation techniques.
Specifications Chapter 8 lists the function generator’s specifications.
7
You can contact Agilent Technologies at one of the following telephone

numbers for warranty, service, or technical support information.
In the United States: (800) 829-4444
In Europe: 31 20 547 2111
In Japan: 0120-421-345
Or use our Web link for information on contacting Agilent worldwide.
www.agilent.com/find/assist
Or contact your Agilent Technologies Representative.
8
Contents
Chapter 1 Quick Start 13

To Prepare the Function Generator for Use 15
To Adjust the Carrying Handle 16
To Set the Output Frequency 17
To Set the Output Amplitude 18
To Set a DC Offset Voltage 20
To Set the High-Level and Low-Level Values 21
To Select “DC Volts” 22
To Set the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave 23
To Configure a Pulse Waveform 24
To View a Waveform Graph 25
To Output a Stored Arbitrary Waveform 26
To Use the Built-In Help System 27
To Rack Mount the Function Generator 29
Contents
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Menu Operation 31
Front-Panel Menu Reference 33
To Select the Output Termination 35
To Reset the Function Generator 35
To Output a Modulated Waveform 36
To Output a PWM Waveform 38
To Output a Frequency Sweep 40
To Output a Burst Waveform 42
To Trigger a Sweep or Burst 44
To Store the Instrument State 45
To Configure the Remote Interface 46
9
Contents
Chapter 3 Features and Functions 51

Output Configuration 53
Pulse Waveforms 68
Amplitude Modulation (AM) 72
Frequency Modulation (FM) 77
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) 84
Frequency Sweep 90
Burst Mode 97
Triggering 106
Optional Arbitrary Waveforms (Option 002) 112
System-Related Operations 119
Remote Interface Configuration 128
External Timebase Reference (Option 001) 137
Calibration Overview 139
Factory Default Settings 143
Contents
Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference 145

SCPI Command Summary 147
Simplified Programming Overview 160
Using the APPLy Command 162
Output Configuration Commands 171
Pulse Configuration Commands 184
Amplitude Modulation (AM) Commands 189
Frequency Modulation (FM) Commands 193
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Commands 197
Frequency Sweep Commands 203
Burst Mode Commands 211
Triggering Commands 219
Arbitrary Waveform Commands (Option 002) 222
State Storage Commands 233
System-Related Commands 237
Interface Configuration Commands 242
Phase-Lock Commands (Option 001 Only) 247
The SCPI Status System 249
Status Reporting Commands 259
Calibration Commands 263
An Introduction to the SCPI Language 265
Using Device Clear 270
10
Contents
Chapter 5 Error Messages 271

Command Errors 273
Execution Errors 276
Device Dependent Errors 291
Query Errors 292
Instrument Errors 293
Self-Test Errors 294
Calibration Errors 296
Arbitrary Waveform Errors 297
Chapter 6 Application Programs 299

Introduction 300
Program Listings 302
Contents
Chapter 7 Tutorial 309
Direct Digital Synthesis 311
Creating Arbitrary Waveforms (Option 002) 314
Square Waveform Generation 316
Pulse Waveform Generation 317
Signal Imperfections 318
Output Amplitude Control 320
Ground Loops 322
Attributes of AC Signals 323
Modulation 326
Frequency Sweep 329
Burst 331
Chapter 8 Specifications 333
11
Contents
Contents
12
1
1
Quick Start
Quick Start
One of the first things to do with your function generator is to become
1 acquainted with the front panel. We have written the exercises in this
chapter to prepare the instrument for use and help you get familiar with
some of its front-panel operations. This chapter is divided into the
following sections:
• To Prepare the Function Generator for Use on page 15

• To Adjust the Carrying Handle on page 16
• To Set the Output Frequency on page 17
• To Set the Output Amplitude on page 18
• To Set a DC Offset Voltage on page 20
• To Set the High-Level and Low-Level Values on page 21
• To Select “DC Volts” on page 22
• To Set the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave on page 23
• To Configure a Pulse Waveform on page 24
• To View a Waveform Graph on page 25
• To Output a Stored Arbitrary Waveform on page 26
• To Use the Built-In Help System on page 27
• To Rack Mount the Function Generator on page 29
14
Chapter 1 Quick Start

To Prepare the Function Generator for Use
1
To Prepare the Function Generator for Use
1 Check the list of supplied items.
Verify that you have received the following items with your instrument.
If anything is missing, please contact your nearest Agilent Sales Office.
• Power cord (for country of destination).

4
• Certificate of Calibration.
• Agilent 33210A Product Reference CD (product software,

programming examples, and manuals).
• Agilent Automation-Ready CD (Agilent IO Libraries Suite).
• USB 2.0 cable.

Note: All of the 33210A product documentation is provided on the Agilent
33210A Product Reference CD that comes with the product, and is also
available on the Web at www.agilent.com/find/33210A. Printed
(hardcopy) manuals are available as an extra cost option.
Power 2 Connect the power cord and turn on the function generator.
Switch
The instrument runs a short power-on self test, which takes a few
seconds. When the instrument is ready for use it displays a message
about how to obtain help, along with the current GPIB address and
USB identification string. The function generator powers up in the sine
wave function at 1 kHz with an amplitude of 100 mV peak-to-peak (into
a 50Ω termination). At power-on, the Output connector is disabled. To
enable the Output connector, press the key.
If the function generator does not turn on, verify that the power cord is
firmly connected to the power receptacle on the rear panel (the power-line
voltage is automatically sensed at power-on). You should also make sure
that the function generator is connected to a power source that is energized.
Then, verify that the function generator is turned on.
If the power-on self test fails, “Self-Test Failed” is displayed along with an
error code. See the Agilent 33210A Service Guide for information on
error codes, and for instructions on returning the function generator to
Agilent for service.
15

To Adjust the Carrying Handle
1
To Adjust the Carrying Handle
To adjust the position, grasp the handle by the sides and pull outward.
Then, rotate the handle to the desired position.
Retracted
Carrying
Position
Extended
16

To Set the Output Frequency
1
To Set the Output Frequency
At power-on, the function generator outputs a sine wave at 1 kHz with
an amplitude of 100 mV peak-to-peak (into a 50Ω termination).
The following steps show you how to change the frequency to 1.2 MHz.
1 Press the “Freq” softkey. 4

The displayed frequency is either the power-on value or the frequency
previously selected. When you change functions, the same frequency is
used if the present value is valid for the new function. To set the
waveform period instead, press the Freq softkey again to toggle to the
Period softkey (the current selection is highlighted).
2 Enter the magnitude of the desired frequency.

Using the numeric keypad, enter the value “1.2”.
3 Select the desired units.

Press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units. When you select
the units, the function generator outputs a waveform with the displayed
frequency (if the output is enabled). For this example, press MHz.
Note: You can also enter the desired value using the knob and cursor
keys.
17

To Set the Output Amplitude
1
At power-on, the function generator outputs a sine wave with an
amplitude of 100 mV peak-to-peak (into a 50Ω termination).
The following steps show you how to change the amplitude to 50 mVrms.
1 Press the “Ampl” softkey.

The displayed amplitude is either the power-on value or the amplitude
previously selected. When you change functions, the same amplitude is
used if the present value is valid for the new function. To set the amplitude
using a high level and low level, press the Ampl softkey again to toggle to
the HiLevel and LoLevel softkeys (the current selection is highlighted).
2 Enter the magnitude of the desired amplitude.

Using the numeric keypad, enter the value “50”.

the units, the function generator outputs the waveform with the displayed
amplitude (if the output is enabled). For this example, press mVRMS.
keys.
18

1
You can easily convert the displayed amplitude from one unit to another.
For example, the following steps show you how to convert the amplitude
from Vrms to Vpp.
4 Enter the numeric entry mode.

Press the key to enter the numeric entry mode.
4
5 Select the new units.

Press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units. The displayed
value is converted to the new units. For this example, press the Vpp
softkey to convert 50 mVrms to its equivalent in volts peak-to-peak.
To change the displayed amplitude by decades, press the right-cursor

key to move the cursor to the units on the right side of the display.
Then, rotate the knob to increase or decrease the displayed amplitude
by decades.
19

To Set a DC Offset Voltage
1
To Set a DC Offset Voltage
At power-on, the function generator outputs a sine wave with a dc offset
of 0 volts (into a 50Ω termination). The following steps show you how to
change the offset to –1.5 mVdc.
1 Press the “Offset” softkey.

The displayed offset voltage is either the power-on value or the offset
previously selected. When you change functions, the same offset is used
if the present value is valid for the new function.
2 Enter the magnitude of the desired offset.

Using the numeric keypad, enter the value “–1.5”.

the units, the function generator outputs the waveform with the displayed
offset (if the output is enabled). For this example, press mVDC.
keys.
20

To Set the High-Level and Low-Level Values
1
To Set the High-Level and Low-Level Values
You can specify a signal by setting its amplitude and dc offset values, as
described previously. Another way to set the limits of a signal is to
specify its high-level (maximum) and low-level (minimum) values. This
is typically convenient for digital applications. In the following example,
let's set the high-level to 1.0 V and the low-level to 0.0 V.
4
1 Press the "Ampl" softkey to select "Ampl".
2 Press the softkey again to toggle to "HiLevel".

Note that both the Ampl and Offset softkeys toggle together, to HiLevel
and LoLevel, respectively.
3 Set the "HiLevel" value.

Using the numeric keypad or the knob, select a value of "1.0 V". (If you
are using the keypad, you will need to select the unit, "V", to enter the
value.)
4 Press the "LoLevel" softkey and set the value.

Again, use the numeric keypad or the knob to enter a value of "0.0 V".
Note that these settings (high-level = "1.0 V" and low-level = "0.0 V") are
equivalent to setting an amplitude of "1.0 Vpp" and an offset of "500
mVdc".
21

To Select “DC Volts”
1
To Select “DC Volts”
You can select the "DC Volts" feature from the “Utility” menu, and then
set a constant dc voltage as an "Offset" value. Let's set "DC Volts" = 1.0
Vdc.
1 Press and then select the DC On softkey.
The Offset value becomes selected.
2 Enter the desired voltage level as an "Offset".

Enter 1.0 Vdc with the numeric keypad or knob.
You can enter any dc voltage from -5 Vdc to +5 Vdc.
22

To Set the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave
1
To Set the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave
At power-on, the duty cycle for square waves is 50%. You can adjust the
duty cycle from 20% to 80% for output frequencies up to 5 MHz. The
following steps show you how to change the duty cycle to 30%.
1 Select the square wave function. 4

Press the key and then set the desired output frequency to any
value up to 5 MHz.
2 Press the “Duty Cycle” softkey.

The displayed duty cycle is either the power-on value or the percentage
previously selected. The duty cycle represents the amount of time per
cycle that the square wave is at a high level (note the icon on the right
side of the display).
3 Enter the desired duty cycle.

Using the numeric keypad or the knob, select a duty cycle value of “30”.
The function generator adjusts the duty cycle immediately and outputs a
square wave with the specified value (if the output is enabled).
23

To Configure a Pulse Waveform
1
To Configure a Pulse Waveform
You can configure the function generator to output a pulse waveform
with variable pulse width and edge time. The following steps show you
how to configure a 500 ms pulse waveform with a pulse width of 10 ms
and edge times of 50 ns.
1 Select the pulse function.

Press the key to select the pulse function and output a pulse
waveform with the default parameters.
2 Set the pulse period.

Press the Period softkey and then set the pulse period to 500 ms.
3 Set the pulse width.

Press the Width softkey and then set the pulse width to 10 ms. The pulse
width represents the time from the 50% threshold of the rising edge to
the 50% threshold of the next falling edge (note the display icon).
4 Set the edge time for both edges.

Press the Edge Time softkey and then set the edge time for both the
rising and falling edges to 50 ns. The edge time represents the time from
the 10% threshold to the 90% threshold of each edge (note the display icon).
24

To View a Waveform Graph
1
To View a Waveform Graph
In the Graph Mode, you can view a graphical representation of the
current waveform parameters. The softkeys are listed in the same order
as in the normal display mode, and they perform the same functions.
However, only one label (for example, Freq or Period) is displayed for
each softkey at one time.
4
1 Enable the Graph Mode.
Press the key to enable the Graph Mode. The name of the currently
selected parameter, shown in the upper-left corner of the display, and the
parameter’s numeric value field are both highlighted.
2 Select the desired parameter.

To select a specific parameter, note the softkey labels at the bottom of
the display. For example, to select period, press the Period softkey.
• As in the normal display mode, you can edit numbers using either the
numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys.
• Parameters which normally toggle when you press a key a second time
also toggle in the Graph Mode. However, you can see only one label
for each softkey at one time (for example, Freq or Period).
• To exit the Graph Mode, press again.
The key also serves as a key to restore front-panel control

after remote interface operations.
25

To Output a Stored Arbitrary Waveform
1
To Output a Stored Arbitrary Waveform
Note: Arbitrary waveforms are optionally available with the 33210A
(Option 002). To upgrade your 33210A to include arbitrary waveform
functionality, go to www.agilent.com/find/33210U.
There are five built-in arbitrary waveforms stored in non-volatile memory.
The following steps show you how to output the built-in “exponential fall”
waveform from the front panel.
For information on creating a custom arbitrary waveform, refer to “To

Create and Store an Arbitrary Waveform” on page 113.
1 Select the arbitrary waveform function.

When you press the key to select the arbitrary waveform function,
a temporary message is displayed indicating which waveform is currently
selected (the default is “exponential rise”).
2 Select the active waveform.

Press the Select Wform softkey and then press the Built-In softkey to
select from the five built-in waveforms. Then press the Exp Fall softkey.
The waveform is output using the present settings for frequency,
amplitude, and offset unless you change them.
The selected waveform is now assigned to the key. Whenever you

press this key, the selected arbitrary waveform is output. To quickly
determine which arbitrary waveform is currently selected, press .
26

To Use the Built-In Help System
1
The built-in help system is designed to provide context-sensitive
assistance on any front-panel key or menu softkey. A list of help topics
is also available to assist you with several front-panel operations.
1 View the help information for a function key. 4

Press and hold down the key. If the message contains more
information than will fit on the display, press the ↓ softkey or turn the
knob clockwise to view the remaining information.
Press DONE to exit Help.
2 View the help information for a menu softkey.

Press and hold down the Freq softkey. If the message contains more
information than will fit on the display, press the ↓ softkey or rotate the
knob clockwise to view the remaining information.
27

1
3 View the list of help topics.
Press the key to view the list of available help topics. To scroll
through the list, press the ↑ or ↓ softkey or rotate the knob. Select the
third topic “Get HELP on any key” and then press SELECT.
4 View the help information for displayed messages.

Whenever a limit is exceeded or any other invalid configuration is found,
the function generator will display a message. For example, if you enter
a value that exceeds the frequency limit for the selected function,
a message will be displayed. The built-in help system provides additional
information on the most recent message to be displayed.
Press the key, select the first topic “View the last message displayed”,
and then press SELECT.
Local Language Help: The built-in help system in available in multiple

languages. All messages, context-sensitive help, and help topics appear
in the selected language. The menu softkey labels and status line
messages are not translated.
To select the local language, press the key, press the System
softkey, and then press the Help In softkey. Select the desired language.
28

To Rack Mount the Function Generator
1
You can mount the Agilent 33210A in a standard 19-inch rack cabinet
using one of two optional kits available. Instructions and mounting
hardware are included with each rack-mounting kit. Any Agilent
System II instrument of the same size can be rack-mounted beside the
Agilent 33210A.
4
Note: Remove the carrying handle, and the front and rear rubber bumpers,
before rack-mounting the instrument.
To remove the handle, rotate it to vertical and pull the ends outward.
Front Rear (bottom view)
To remove the rubber bumper, stretch a corner and then slide it off.
29

To rack mount a single instrument, order adapter kit 5063-9240.
To rack mount two instruments side-by-side, order lock-link kit 5061- 8769
and flange kit 5063-9212. Be sure to use the support rails in the rack cabinet.
In order to prevent overheating, do not block the flow of air into or out of
the instrument. Be sure to allow enough clearance at the rear, sides, and
bottom of the instrument to permit adequate internal air flow.
30
Front-Panel Menu Operation

Front-Panel Menu Operation

This chapter introduces you to the front-panel keys and menu operation.
This chapter does not give a detailed description of every front-panel key
or menu operation. It does, however, give you an overview of the front-
panel menus and many front-panel operations. See chapter 3 “Features
and Functions,” starting on page 51, for a complete discussion of the
function generator’s capabilities and operation.
2 • Front-Panel Menu Reference, on page 33

• To Select the Output Termination, on page 35
• To Reset the Function Generator, on page 35
• To Output a Modulated Waveform, on page 36
• To Output a PWM Waveform, on page 38
• To Output a Frequency Sweep, on page 40
• To Output a Burst Waveform, on page 42
• To Trigger a Sweep or Burst, on page 44
• To Store the Instrument State, on page 45
• To Configure the Remote Interface, on page 46
32
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Menu Operation

Front-Panel Menu Reference

This section gives an overview of the front-panel menus. The remainder
of this chapter contains examples of using the front-panel menus.
2
Configure the modulation parameters for AM, FM, and PWM. 4
• Select the modulation type.
• Select an internal or external modulation source.
• Specify AM modulation depth, modulating frequency, and modulation shape.
• Specify FM frequency deviation, modulating frequency, and modulation shape.
• Specify PWM deviation, modulating frequency, and modulation shape.
Configure the parameters for frequency sweep.
• Select linear or logarithmic sweeping.

• Select the start /stop frequencies or center/ span frequencies.
• Select the time in seconds required to complete a sweep.
• Specify a marker frequency.
• Specify an internal or external trigger source for the sweep.
• Specify the slope (rising or falling edge) for an external trigger source.
• Specify the slope (rising or falling edge) of the “Trig Out” signal.
Configure the parameters for burst.
• Select the triggered (N Cycle) or externally-gated burst mode.

• Select the number of cycles per burst (1 to 50,000, or Infinite).
• Select the starting phase angle of the burst (-360° to +360°).
• Specify the time from the start of one burst to the start of the next burst.
• Specify an internal or external trigger source for the burst.
• Specify the slope (rising or falling edge) for an external trigger source.
• Specify the slope (rising or falling edge) of the “Trig Out” signal.
33

Store and recall instrument states.
• Store up to four instrument states in non-volatile memory.

• Assign a custom name to each storage location.
2 • Recall stored instrument states.
• Restore all instrument settings to their factory default values.
• Select the instrument’s power-on configuration (last or factory default).
Configure system-related parameters.
• Generate a dc-only voltage level.

• Enable/disable the Sync signal which is output from the “Sync” connector.
• Select the output termination (1Ω to 10 kΩ, or Infinite).
• Enable/disable amplitude autoranging.
• Select the waveform polarity (normal or inverted).
• Select the GPIB address.
• Specify the LAN configuration (IP address and network configuration).
• Select how periods and commas are used in numbers displayed on the front panel.
• Select the local language for front-panel messages and help text.
• Enable/disable the tone heard when an error is generated.
• Enable/disable the display bulb-saver mode.
• Adjust the contrast setting of the front-panel display.
• Perform an instrument self-test.
• Secure/ unsecure the instrument for calibration and perform manual calibrations.
• Query the instrument’s firmware revision codes.
View the list of Help topics.
• View the last message displayed.

• View the remote command error queue.
• Get HELP on any key.
• How to generate a dc-only voltage level.
• How to generate a modulated waveform.
• How to create an arbitrary waveform.
• How to reset the instrument to its default state.
• How to view a waveform in the Graph Mode.
• How to synchronize multiple instruments.
• How to obtain Agilent Technical Support.
34

To Select the Output Termination
To Select the Output Termination

The Agilent 33210A has a fixed series output impedance of 50 ohms to
the front-panel Output connector. If the actual load impedance is
different than the value specified, the displayed amplitude and offset 2
levels will be incorrect. The load impedance setting is simply provided
as a convenience to ensure that the displayed voltage matches the
expected load. 4
1 Press .
2 Navigate the menu to set the output termination.

Press the Output Setup softkey and then select the Load softkey.
3 Select the desired output termination.

Use the knob or numeric keypad to select the desired load impedance or
press the Load softkey again to choose “High Z”.
To Reset the Function Generator

To reset the instrument to its factory default state, press and then
select the Set to Defaults softkey. Press YES to confirm the operation.
For a complete listing of the instrument’s power-on and reset conditions,

see “Agilent 33210A Factory Default Settings” on page 144.
35

To Output a Modulated Waveform

A modulated waveform consists of a carrier and a modulating waveform.
In AM (amplitude modulation), the amplitude of the carrier is varied by
2 the amplitude of the modulating waveform. For this example, you will
output an AM waveform with 80% modulation depth. The carrier will
be a 5 kHz sine wave and the modulating waveform will be a 200 Hz
sine wave.
1 Select the function, frequency, and amplitude of the carrier.

Press and then press the Freq, Ampl, and Offset softkeys to
configure the carrier waveform. For this example, select a 5 kHz sine wave
with an amplitude of 5 Vpp.
2 Select AM.
Press and then select “AM” using the Type softkey. Notice that
a status message “AM by Sine” is shown in the upper-left corner of
the display.
3 Set the modulation depth.

Press the AM Depth softkey and then set the value to 80% using the
36

4 Set the modulating frequency.

Press the AM Freq softkey and then set the value to 200 Hz using the
2
4
5 Select the modulating waveform shape.
Press the Shape softkey to select the shape of the modulating waveform.
For this example, select a sine wave.
At this point, the function generator outputs an AM waveform with the
specified modulation parameters (if the output is enabled).
6 View the waveform.

Press to view the waveform parameters.
To turn off the Graph Mode, press again.
37

To Output a PWM Waveform

You can configure the function generator to output a pulse width
modulated (PWM) waveform. The Agilent 33210A provides PWM for
2 pulse carrier waveforms, and PWM is the only type of modulation
supported for pulse waveforms. In PWM, the pulse width or duty cycle of
the carrier waveform is varied according to the modulating waveform.
You can specify either a pulse width and width deviation, or a pulse duty
cycle and duty cycle deviation, the deviation to be controlled by the
modulating waveform.
For this example, you will specify a pulse width and pulse width
deviation for a 1 kHz pulse waveform with a 100 Hz sine wave
modulating waveform.
1 Select the carrier waveform parameters.
Press and then press the Freq, Ampl, Offset, Width, and Edge Time
softkeys to configure the carrier waveform. For this example, select a 1
kHz pulse waveform with an amplitude of 1 Vpp, a zero offset, a pulse
width of 100 µs, and an edge time of 50 ns.
2 Select PWM.
Press (PWM is the only modulation type for Pulse). Notice that a
status message "PWM by Sine" is shown in the upper-left corner of the
display.
3 Set the width deviation.

Press the Width Dev softkey and set the value to 20 µs using the numeric
keypad or the knob and cursor keys.
38


Press the PWM Freq softkey and then set the value to 5 Hz using the
2
4
5 Select the modulating waveform shape.
Press the Shape softkey to select the shape of the modulating waveform.
For this example, select a sine wave.
At this point, the function generator outputs a PWM waveform with the
specified modulation parameters (if the output is enabled).
Press to view the waveform and parameters.

Of course, to really view the PWM waveform, you would need to output it
to an oscilloscope. If you do this, you will see how the pulse width varies,
in this case, from 80 to 120 µs. At a modulation frequency of 5 Hz, the
deviation is quite visible.
39

To Output a Frequency Sweep

In the frequency sweep mode, the function generator “steps” from the
start frequency to the stop frequency at a sweep rate which you specify.
2 You can sweep up or down in frequency, and with either linear or
logarithmic spacing. For this example, you will output a swept sine wave
from 50 Hz to 5 kHz. You will not change the other parameters from their
default settings: internal sweep trigger, linear spacing, and 1 second
sweep time.
1 Select the function and amplitude for the sweep.

For sweeps, you can select sine, square, or ramp waveforms (pulse, noise,
dc, and arbitrary waveforms are not allowed). For this example, select a
sine wave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp.
2 Select the sweep mode.

Press and then verify that the linear sweep mode is currently
selected. Notice that a status message “Linear Sweep” is shown in the
upper-left corner of the display.
3 Set the start frequency.

Press the Start softkey and then set the value to 50 Hz using the numeric
40

4 Set the stop frequency.

Press the Stop softkey and then set the value to 5 kHz using the numeric
2
4
At this point, the function generator outputs a continuous sweep from
50 Hz to 5 kHz (if the output is enabled).
Note: If desired, you can set the frequency boundaries of the sweep using
a center frequency and frequency span. These parameters are similar to
the start frequency and stop frequency and are included to give you added
flexibility. To achieve the same results, set the center frequency to 2.525
kHz and the frequency span to 4.950 kHz.

You can generate a single frequency sweep by pressing the key.

For more information, see “To Trigger a Sweep or Burst” on page 44.
41

To Output a Burst Waveform

You can configure the function generator to output a waveform with a
specified number of cycles, called a burst. You can output the burst at a
2 rate determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the
rear-panel Trig In connector. For this example, you will output a three-
cycle sine wave with a 20 ms burst period. You will not change the other
parameters from their default settings: internal burst source and 0 degree
starting phase.
1 Select the function and amplitude for the burst.

For burst waveforms, you can select sine, square, or ramp waveforms
(pulse, noise, dc, and arbitrary waveforms are not allowed). For this
example, select a sine wave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp.
2 Select the burst mode.
Press and then verify that the “N Cycle” (internally-triggered)

mode is currently selected. Notice that a status message “N Cycle Burst”
is shown in the upper-left corner of the display.
3 Set the burst count.

Press the # Cycles softkey and then set the count to “3” using the
numeric keypad or knob.
42

4 Set the burst period.

Press the Burst Period softkey and then set the period to 20 ms using the
numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys. The burst period sets the
time from the start of one burst to the start of the next burst (note the
display icon).
2
4
At this point, the function generator outputs a continuous three-cycle burst

(if the output is enabled).
You can generate a single burst (with the specified count) by pressing
the key. For more information, see “To Trigger a Sweep or Burst”
on page 44.
You can also use an external gate signal to either turn the burst signal
“on” or “off” based on the external signal applied to the rear-panel Trig In
connector. For more information see Burst Mode, page 97.
43

To Trigger a Sweep or Burst
To Trigger a Sweep or Burst

You can issue triggers from the front panel for sweeps and bursts using a
manual trigger or an internal trigger.
2 • Internal or “automatic” triggering is enabled with the default settings
of the function generator. In this mode, the function generator
outputs continuously when the sweep or burst mode is selected.
• Manual triggering initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time
you press the key from the front-panel. Continue pressing this
key to re-trigger the function generator.
• The key is disabled when in remote (the remote icon turns on

while in remote) and when a function other than sweep or burst is
currently selected (or when the output is disabled). The key
flashes off momentarily when using a manual trigger.
44

To Store the Instrument State
To Store the Instrument State

You can store the instrument state in one of four non-volatile storage
locations. A fifth storage location automatically holds the power-down
configuration of the instrument. When power is restored, the instrument 2
can automatically return to its state before power-down.
1 Select the desired storage location. 4

Press and then select the Store State softkey.
2 Select a custom name for the selected location.

If desired, you can assign a custom name to each of the four locations.
• The name can contain up to 12 characters. The first character must

be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters, numbers, or
the underscore character ( “_”).
• To add additional characters, press the right-cursor key until the

cursor is to the right of the existing name and then turn the knob.
• To delete all characters to the right of the cursor position, press .
• To use numbers in the name, you can enter them directly from the
numeric keypad. Use the decimal point from the numeric keypad to
add the underscore character (“_”) to the name.
3 Store the instrument state.

Press the STORE STATE softkey. The instrument stores the selected
function, frequency, amplitude, dc offset, duty cycle, symmetry, as well
as any modulation parameters in use. The instrument does not store
volatile waveforms created in the arbitrary waveform function.
45

To Configure the Remote Interface

The Agilent 33210A supports remote interface communication using a
choice of three interfaces: GPIB, USB, and LAN (LXI Class C compliant).
2 All three interfaces are "live" at power up. The following sections tell how
to configure the remote interface from the instrument front panel.
Note: Two CDs, provided with your instrument, contain connectivity
software to enable communications over the remote interfaces. See
“Connectivity Software and Product CDs,” page 128, for further
information on these CDs and the software they contain.
GPIB Configuration
You need only select a GPIB address.
1 Select the “I/O” menu.
Press and then press the I/O softkey.
2 Set the GPIB address.

Use the knob and cursor keys or the numeric keypad to select a GPIB
address in the range 0 through 30 (the factory default is “10”).
The GPIB address is shown on the front-panel display at power-on.
3 Exit the menu.

Press the DONE softkey.
USB Configuration
The USB interface requires no front panel configuration parameters.
Just connect the Agilent 33210A to your PC with the appropriate USB
cable. The interface will self configure. Press the Show USB Id softkey in
the “I/O menu” to see the USB interface identification string. Both USB
1.1 and USB 2.0 are supported.
46

LAN Configuration
There are several parameters that you may need to set to establish
network communication using the LAN interface. Primarily, you will
need to establish an IP address. You may need to contact your network
administrator for help in establishing communication with the LAN
interface.
2
4 Select the “I/O” menu. 4
Press and then press the I/O softkey.
5 Select the “LAN” menu.

Press the LAN softkey.
You can select Modify Settings to change the LAN settings, or Current
Config to view the current LAN settings (including the MAC address).
Press Modify Settings.
From this menu, you can select Reset LAN to restart the LAN, IP Setup
to set an IP address and related parameters, DNS Setup to configure
DNS, or Password to set a password for the Web Server Interface.
Note: To set a password use the knob and cursor keys (use to delete
all characters to the right of the cursor position). The Web Server
Interface will prompt for the password to protect certain windows. See
”Agilent 33210A Web Interface,” page 136, for further information.
47

6 Establish an “IP Setup.”

To use the Agilent 33210A on the network, you must first establish an IP
setup, including an IP address, and possibly a subnet mask and gateway
address. Press the IP Setup softkey. By default, both DHCP and Auto IP
are set to On.
2
With DHCP On, an IP address will automatically be set by DHCP

(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) when you connect the Agilent
33210A to the network, provided the DHCP server is found and is able to
do so. DHCP also automatically deals with the subnet mask and gateway
address, if required. This is typically the easiest way to establish LAN
communication for your instrument. All you need to do is leave DHCP On.
With Auto IP On, if DHCP fails to assign an IP address, Auto IP will
attempt to do so after a time-out period.
However, if you cannot establish communication by means of DHCP or
Auto IP, you will need to manually set an IP address, and a subnet mask
and gateway address if they are in use. Follow these steps:
a. Set the “IP Address.” Press the softkeys to select DHCP Off and
Auto IP Off. The manual selection softkeys appear and the current IP
address is displayed:
Contact your network administrator for the IP address to use. All IP

addresses take the dot-notation form "nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn" where "nnn"
in each case is a byte value in the range 0 through 255. You can enter
a new IP address using the numeric keypad (not the knob). Just type
in the numbers and the period delimiters using the keypad. Use the
left cursor key as a backspace key. Do not enter leading zeros. For
further information, see “More about IP Addresses and Dot Notation”
at the end of this section.
48

b. Set the “Subnet Mask.” The subnet mask is required if your

network has been divided into subnets. Ask your network
administrator whether a subnet mask is needed, and for the correct
mask. Press the Subnet Mask softkey and enter the subnet mask in
the IP address format (using the keypad).
2
4
c. Set the “Default Gateway.” The gateway address is the address of

a gateway, which is a device that connects two networks. Ask your
network administrator whether a gateway is in use and for the
correct address. Press the Default Gateway softkey and enter the
gateway address in the IP address format (using the keypad).
d. Exit the “IP Setup” menu. Press DONE to return to the "Modify
Settings" menu.
7 Configure the “DNS Setup” (optional).

DNS (Domain Name Service) is an Internet service that translates
domain names into IP addresses. Ask your network administrator
whether DNS is in use, and if it is, for the host name, domain name, and
DNS server address to use.
Start at the “Modify Settings” menu.
Press the DNS Setup softkey to display the “Host Name” field.
a. Set the “Host Name.” Enter the host name. The host name is the
host portion of the domain name, which is translated into an IP
address. The host name is entered as a string using the knob and
cursor keys to select and change characters. The host name may
49

include letters, numbers, and dashes (“-”). You can use the keypad for
the numeric characters only.
Press to delete all characters to the right of the cursor position.
b. Set the “Domain Name.” Press the Domain Name softkey and enter
2 the domain name. The domain name is translated into an IP address.
The domain name is entered as a string using the knob and cursor
keys to select and change characters. The domain name may include
letters, numbers, dashes (“-”), and periods (“.“). You can use the
keypad for the numeric characters only.
Press to delete all characters to the right of the cursor position.
c. Set the “DNS Server” address. Press the DNS Server softkey and
enter the address of the DNS server in the IP address format (using
the keypad).
8 Exit the menus.
Press DONE to exit each menu in turn, or press to exit the “Utility”
menu directly.
More about IP Addresses and Dot Notation

Dot-notation addresses ("nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn" where "nnn" is a byte value)
such as IP addresses must be expressed with care. This is because
most web software on the PC will interpret byte values with leading zeros
as octal numbers. Thus, "255.255.020.011" is actually equivalent to the
decimal "255.255.16.9" rather than "255.255.20.11" because ".020" is
interpreted as "16" expressed in octal, and ".011" as "9". To avoid
confusion it is best to use only decimal expressions of byte values
(0 to 255), with no leading zeros.
The Agilent 33210A assumes that all IP addresses and other dot-
notation addresses are expressed as decimal byte values, and strips all
leading zeros from these byte values. Thus, if you try to enter
"255.255.020.011" in the IP address field, it becomes "255.255.20.11"
(a purely decimal expression). You should enter exactly the same
expression, "255.255.20.11" in your PC web software to address the
instrument. Do not use "255.255.020.011"—the PC will interpret that
address differently due to the leading zeros.
50
Features and Functions

Features and Functions

This chapter makes it easy to look up all the details about a particular
feature of the function generator. It covers both front panel and remote
interface operation. You may want to read chapter 2, “Front-Panel Menu
Operation” first. See chapter 4, “Remote Interface Reference” for a
detailed discussion of the syntax of the SCPI commands to program the
function generator. This chapter is divided into the following sections:
• Output Configuration on page 53

• Pulse Waveforms on page 68
• Amplitude Modulation (AM) on page 72
• Frequency Modulation (FM) on page 77
• Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) on page 93
3 • Frequency Sweep on page 90
• Burst Mode on page 97
• Triggering on page 106
• Optional Arbitrary Waveforms (Option 002) on page 112
• System-Related Operations on page 119
• Remote Interface Configuration on page 128
• External Timebase Reference (Option 001) on page 137
• Calibration Overview on page 139
• Factory Default Settings on page 143
Throughout this manual “default” states and values are identified. These
are the power-on default states provided you have not enabled the
power-down recall mode (see “Instrument State Storage” on page 119).
Throughout this manual, the following conventions are used for

SCPI command syntax for remote interface programming:
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) indicate optional keywords or parameters.
• Braces ( { } ) enclose parameters within a command string.
• Triangle brackets ( < > ) enclose parameters for which you must
substitute a value.
• A vertical bar ( | ) separates multiple parameter choices.
52
Chapter 3 Features and Functions

Output Configuration
This section contains information to help you configure the function
generator for outputting waveforms. You may never have to change some
of the parameters discussed here, but they are provided to give you the
flexibility you might need.
Output Function
The function generator can output five standard waveforms (sine,
square, ramp, pulse, and noise), plus dc. You can also select one of five
optional built-in arbitrary waveforms or create your own custom 3
waveforms. You can internally modulate sine and square waveforms
using AM or FM (but not ramp, pulse, noise, dc, or arbitrary). You can
also modulate pulse using PWM. Linear or logarithmic frequency
sweeping is available for sine, square, and ramp waveforms (but not
pulse, noise, dc, or arbitrary). You can generate a burst waveform using
sine, square, and ramp waveforms (but not pulse, noise, dc, or arbitrary).
The default function is sine wave.
• The table below shows which output functions are allowed with
modulation, sweep, and burst. Each “ • ” indicates a valid
combination. If you change to a function that is not allowed with
modulation, sweep, or burst, then the modulation or mode is turned
off.
Sine Square Ramp Pulse Noise DC Arb/

User1
AM, FM Carrier • •
PWM Carrier •
Sweep Mode • • •
Burst Mode • • •
1
Note: Arbitrary waveforms are also referred to as user-defined
waveforms.
53

• Function Limitations: If you change to a function whose maximum

frequency is less than that of the current function, the frequency is
adjusted to the maximum value for the new function. For example,
if you are currently outputting a 10 MHz sine wave and then change
to the ramp function, the function generator will automatically adjust
the output frequency to 100 kHz (the upper limit for ramps).
• Amplitude Limitations: If you change to a function whose maximum

amplitude is less than that of the current function, the amplitude is
automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new function.
This may occur when the output units are Vrms or dBm due to the
differences in crest factor for the various output functions.
3
For example, if you output a 5 Vrms square wave (into 50 ohms) and
then change to the sine wave function, the function generator will
automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3.536 Vrms (the upper
limit for sine in Vrms).
• Front-Panel Operation: To select a function, press any key in the top

row of function keys. Press to output the arbitrary waveform
currently selected. To view the other arbitrary waveform choices,
press the Select Wform softkey.
To select dc volts from the front panel, press and then select the
DC On softkey. Press the Offset softkey to enter the desired offset
voltage level.
• Remote Interface Operation:
FUNCtion {SINusoid|SQUare|RAMP|PULSe|NOISe|DC|USER}
You can also use the APPLy command to select the function, frequency,
amplitude, and offset with a single command.
54

Output Frequency
As shown below, the output frequency range depends on the function
currently selected. The default frequency is 1 kHz for all functions.
Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency
Sine 1 mHz 10 MHz

Square 1 mHz 10 MHz
Ramp 1 mHz 100 kHz
Pulse 1 mHz 5 MHz
Noise, DC Not Applicable Not Applicable
Arbitrary 1 mHz 3 MHz
3
the output frequency to 100 kHz (the upper limit for ramps).
• Burst Limitation: For internally-triggered bursts, the minimum

frequency is 2.001 mHz. For sine and square waveforms, frequencies
above 3 MHz are allowed only with an “infinite” burst count.
• Cycle Limitations: For square waveforms, the function generator may

not be able to use the full range of duty cycle values at higher
frequencies as shown below.
20% to 80% (to 5 MHz)

40% to 60% (to 10 MHz)
If you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle,
the duty cycle is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the
new frequency. For example, if you currently have the duty cycle set
to 70% and then change the frequency to 6 MHz, the function
generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to 60% (the upper
limit for this frequency).
55

• Front-Panel Operation: To set the output frequency, press the Freq

softkey for the selected function. Then use the knob or numeric
keypad to enter the desired frequency. To set the waveform period
instead, press the Freq softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey.
FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
3
Output Amplitude
The default amplitude is 100 mVpp (into 50 ohms) for all functions.
• Offset Voltage Limitations: The relationship between output

amplitude and offset voltage is shown below. Vmax is the maximum
peak voltage for the selected output termination (5 volts for a 50Ω
load or 10 volts for a high-impedance load).
Vpp < 2 X (Vmax – |Voffset|)
• Limits Due to Output Termination: If you change the output

termination setting, the displayed output amplitude will be adjusted
(and no error will be generated). For example, if you set the amplitude
to 10 Vpp and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to
“high impedance”, the amplitude displayed on the function
generator’s front-panel will double to 20 Vpp. If you change from
“high impedance” to 50 ohms, the displayed amplitude will drop in
half. For more information, see “Output Termination” on page 61.
• Limits Due to Units Selection: In some cases, the amplitude limits

are determined by the output units selected. This may occur when the
units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the
various output functions. For example, if you output a 5 Vrms square
wave (into 50 ohms) and then change to the sine wave function,
the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude
to 3.536 Vrms (the upper limit for sine waves in Vrms).
56

• You can set the output amplitude in Vpp, Vrms, or dBm. For more
information, see “Output Units” on page 60.
• You cannot specify the output amplitude in dBm if the output

termination is currently set to “high impedance”. The units are
automatically converted to Vpp. For more information, see “Output
Units” on page 60.
• Arbitrary Waveform Limitations: For arbitrary waveforms, the

maximum amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do
not span the full range of the output DAC (Digital- to-Analog Converter).
For example, the built-in “Sinc” waveform does not use the full range
of values between ±1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is limited
to 6.087 Vpp (into 50 ohms).
3
• While changing amplitude, you may notice a momentary disruption
in the output waveform at certain voltages due to switching of the
output attenuators. To prevent this disruption in the output, you can
disable the voltage autoranging feature as described on page 64.
• You can also set the amplitude (with an associated offset voltage)
by specifying a high level and low level. For example, if you set the
high level to +2 volts and the low level to -3 volts, the resulting
amplitude is 5 Vpp (with an offset voltage of -500 mV).
• For dc volts, the output level is actually controlled by setting the

offset voltage. You can set the dc level to any value between ±5 Vdc
into 50 ohms or ±10 Vdc into an open circuit. See “DC Offset Voltage”
on the following page for more information.
DC On softkey. Press the Offset softkey to set the desired offset
voltage level.
• Front-Panel Operation: To set the output amplitude, press the Ampl

keypad to enter the desired amplitude. To set the amplitude using a
high level and low level, press the Ampl softkey again to toggle to the
HiLevel and LoLevel softkeys.
57

VOLTage {<amplitude>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Or, you can set the amplitude by specifying a high level and low level
using the following commands.
VOLTage:HIGH {<voltage>|MINimum|MAXimum}
VOLTage:LOW {<voltage>|MINimum|MAXimum}
3
DC Offset Voltage
The default offset is 0 volts for all functions.
• Limits Due to Amplitude: The relationship between offset voltage and

output amplitude is shown below. Vmax is the maximum peak voltage
for the selected output termination (5 volts for a 50Ω load or 10 volts
for a high-impedance load).
Vpp
|Voffset| < Vmax – -----------
2
If the specified offset voltage is not valid, the function generator will
automatically adjust it to the maximum dc voltage allowed with the
amplitude specified.
• Limits Due to Output Termination: The offset limits are determined

by the current output termination setting. For example, if you set the
offset to 100 mVdc and then change the output termination from
50 ohms to “high impedance”, the offset voltage displayed on the
function generator’s front-panel will double to 200 mVdc (and no error
will be generated). If you change from “high impedance” to 50 ohms,
the displayed offset will drop in half. See “Output Termination” on
page 61 for more information.
58


maximum offset and amplitude will be limited if the waveform data
points do not span the full range of the output DAC (Digital-to-Analog
Converter). For example, the built-in “Sinc” waveform does not use
the full range of values between ±1 and therefore its maximum offset
is limited to 4.95 volts (into 50 ohms).
• You can also set the offset by specifying a high level and low level.
For example, if you set the high level to +2 volts and the low level to
-3 volts, the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp (with an offset voltage of
-500 mV).
• For dc volts, the output level is actually controlled by setting the

offset voltage. You can set the dc level to any value between ±5 Vdc
3
into 50 ohms or ±10 Vdc into an open circuit.
DC On softkey. Press the Offset softkey to set the desired offset
voltage level.
• Front-Panel Operation: To set the dc offset, press the Offset softkey

for the selected function. Then use the knob or numeric keypad to
enter the desired offset. To set the offset using a high level and low
level, press the Offset softkey again to toggle to the HiLevel and
LoLevel softkeys.
VOLTage:OFFSet {<offset>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Or, you can set the offset by specifying a high level and low level
using the following commands.
VOLTage:HIGH {<voltage>|MINimum|MAXimum}
VOLTage:LOW {<voltage>|MINimum|MAXimum}
59

Output Units
Applies to output amplitude only. At power-on, the units for output
amplitude are volts peak-to-peak.
• Output units: Vpp, Vrms, or dBm. The default is Vpp.
• The unit setting is stored in volatile memory. The units are set to
“Vpp” when power has been off or after a remote interface reset
(provided the Power On state is set to “default”).
• The function generator uses the current units selection for both front
panel and remote interface operations. For example, if you select
3 “VRMS” from the remote interface, the units are displayed as
“VRMS” on the front panel.
• The output units for amplitude cannot be set to dBm if the output
automatically converted to Vpp.
• Front-Panel Operation: Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired

magnitude and then press the appropriate softkey to select the units.
You can also convert from one unit to another from the front panel.
For example, to convert 2 Vpp to its equivalent value in Vrms,
press and then press the VRMS softkey. The converted value is
707.1 mVrms for a sine wave.
VOLTage:UNIT {VPP|VRMS|DBM}
60

Output Termination
Applies to output amplitude and offset voltage only. The Agilent 33210A
has a fixed series output impedance of 50 ohms to the front-panel Output
connector. If the actual load impedance is different than the value
specified, the displayed amplitude and offset levels will be incorrect.
• Output termination: 1Ω to 10 kΩ, or Infinite. The default is 50Ω. The

message line at the top of the display calls attention to output
termination settings other than 50Ω.
• The output termination setting is stored in non-volatile memory

and does not change when power has been off or after a remote
interface reset (assuming the Power On state is set to “default”). 3
• If you specify a 50-ohm termination but are actually terminating into
an open circuit, the actual output will be twice the value specified.
For example, if you set the offset to 100 mVdc (and specify a 50-ohm
load) but are terminating the output into an open circuit, the actual
offset will be 200 mVdc.
• If you change the output termination setting, the displayed output

amplitude and offset levels are automatically adjusted (no error will
be generated). For example, if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and
then change the output termination from 50 ohms to “high
impedance”, the amplitude displayed on the function generator’s
front-panel will double to 20 Vpp. If you change from “high impedance”
to 50 ohms, the displayed amplitude will drop in half.

automatically converted to Vpp.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and select the Output Setup

softkey. Then use the knob or numeric keypad to select the desired
load impedance or press the Load softkey again to choose “High Z”.
OUTPut:LOAD {<ohms>|INFinity|MINimum|MAXimum}
61

Duty Cycle (Square Waves)

The duty cycle of a square wave represents the amount of time per cycle
that the square wave is at a high level (assuming that the waveform is
not inverted).
20% Duty Cycle 80% Duty Cycle
3
(See Pulse Waveforms on page 68 for information about duty cycle for
pulse waveforms.)
• Duty Cycle: 20% to 80% (to 5 MHz)

40% to 60% (to 10 MHz)
• The duty cycle is stored in volatile memory; the duty cycle is set to
50% (the default) when power has been off or after a remote interface
reset (assuming the Power On state is set to “default”).
• The duty cycle setting is remembered when you change from square
wave to another function. When you return to the square function,
the previous duty cycle is used.
• Limits Due to Frequency: If the square wave function is selected and

you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle,
limit for this frequency).
• The duty cycle setting does not apply to a square waveform used as
the modulating waveform for AM, FM, or PWM. A 50% duty cycle is
always used for a modulating square waveform. The duty cycle
setting applies only to a square waveform carrier.
• Front-Panel Operation: After selecting the square wave function,

press the Duty Cycle softkey. Then use the knob or numeric keypad
to enter the desired duty cycle.
62

FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle {<percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
The APPLy command automatically sets the duty cycle to 50%.
Symmetry (Ramp Waves)

Applies to ramp waves only. Symmetry represents the amount of time
per cycle that the ramp wave is rising (assuming that the waveform is
not inverted).
0% Symmetry 100% Symmetry
• The symmetry is stored in volatile memory; the symmetry is set to

100% (the default) when power has been off or after a remote
interface reset (assuming the Power On state is set to “default”).
• The symmetry setting is remembered when you change from ramp

wave to another function. When you return to the ramp function,
the previous symmetry is used.
• If use select a ramp waveform as the modulating waveform for AM,

FM, or PWM, the symmetry setting does not apply.
• Front-Panel Operation: After selecting the ramp function, press the

Symmetry softkey. Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the
desired symmetry.
FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry {<percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
The APPLy command automatically sets the symmetry to 100%.
63

Voltage Autoranging
Autoranging is enabled by default and the function generator
automatically selects the optimal settings for the output amplifier and
attenuators. With autoranging disabled, the function generator uses the
current amplifier and attenuator settings.
• You can disable autoranging to eliminate momentary disruptions

caused by switching of the attenuators while changing amplitude.
However, turning autoranging off has side effects:
• The amplitude and offset accuracy and resolution (as well as

waveform fidelity) may be adversely affected when reducing the
3 amplitude below a range change that would occur with
autoranging on.
• You may not be able to achieve the minimum amplitude that is

available with autoranging on.

softkey. Then press the Range softkey again to toggle between the
“Auto” and “Hold” selections.
VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO {OFF|ON|ONCE}
The APPLy command overrides the voltage autorange setting and

automatically enables autoranging.
Output Control
You can disable or enable the front-panel Output connector. By default,
the output is disabled at power on to protect other equipment. When
enabled, the key is illuminated.
• If an excessive external voltage is applied to the front-panel Output

connector, an error message will be displayed and the output will
be disabled. To re-enable the output, remove the overload from the
Output connector and press to enable the output.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press to enable or disable the output.
64

OUTPut {OFF|ON}
The APPLy command overrides the current setting and automatically

enables the Output connector.
Waveform Polarity
In the normal mode (default), the waveform goes positive during the first
part of the cycle. In the inverted mode, the waveform goes negative
during the first part of the cycle.
3
• As shown in the examples below, the waveform is inverted relative to
the offset voltage. Any offset voltage present will remain unchanged
when the waveform is inverted.
Normal Inverted
Normal Inverted
Offset
0V 0V
No Offset Voltage With Offset Voltage
• When a waveform is inverted, the Sync signal associated with the

waveform is not inverted.

softkey. Then press the Normal softkey again to toggle between the
“Normal” and “Invert” selections.
OUTPut:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}
65

Sync Output Signal

A sync output is provided on the front-panel Sync connector. All of the
standard output functions (except noise and dc) have an associated Sync
signal. For certain applications where you may not want to output the
Sync signal, you can disable the Sync connector.
• By default, the Sync signal is routed to the Sync connector (enabled).

When the Sync signal is disabled, the output level on the Sync
connector is at a logic “low” level.
• When a waveform is inverted (see “Waveform Polarity” on the previous

page), the Sync signal associated with the waveform is not inverted.
3
• The Sync signal setting is overridden by the setting of the marker
used with the sweep mode (see page 94). Therefore, when the marker
is enabled (and the sweep mode is also enabled), the Sync signal
setting is ignored.
• For sine, ramp, and pulse waveforms, the Sync signal is a square
waveform with a 50% duty cycle. The Sync signal is a TTL “high”
when the waveform’s output is positive, relative to zero volts (or the
dc offset value). The Sync signal is a TTL “low” when the output is
negative, relative to zero volts (or the dc offset value).
• For square waveforms, the Sync signal is a square waveform with the
same duty cycle as the main output. The Sync signal is a TTL “high”
when the waveform’s output is positive, relative to zero volts (or the
dc offset value). The Sync signal is a TTL “low” when the output is
negative, relative to zero volts (or the dc offset value).
• For arbitrary waveforms, the Sync signal is a square waveform with a

50% duty cycle. The Sync signal is a TTL “high” when the first
downloaded waveform pint is output.
• For internally-modulated AM, FM, and PWM, the Sync signal is

referenced to the modulating waveform (not the carrier) and is a
square waveform with a 50% duty cycle. The Sync signal is a TTL
“high” during the first half of the modulating waveform.
• For externally-modulated AM, FM, and PWM, the Sync signal is

referenced to the carrier waveform (not the modulating waveform)
and is a square waveform with a 50% duty cycle.
66

• For frequency sweeps with Marker Off, the Sync signal is a square
waveform with a 50% duty cycle for the duration of the sweep. The
Sync signal is a TTL “high” at the beginning of the sweep and goes
“low” at the midpoint of the sweep. The Sync signal is synchronized
with the sweep, but is not literally equal to the sweep time because its
timing includes the re-arm time.
• For frequency sweeps with Marker On, the Sync signal is a TTL “high”
at the beginning of the sweep and goes “low” at the marker frequency.
• For a triggered burst, the Sync signal is a TTL “high” when the burst
begins. The Sync signal is a TTL “low” at the end of the specified
number of cycles (may not be the zero-crossing point if the waveform
has an associated start phase). For an infinite count burst, the Sync
3
signal is the same as for a continuous waveform.
• For an externally-gated burst, the Sync signal follows the external

gate signal. However, note that the signal will not go to a TTL “low”
until the end of the last cycle (may not be the zero-crossing point if
the waveform has an associated start phase).
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and select the Sync softkey again

to toggle between “off” and “on”.
OUTPut:SYNC {OFF|ON} Setting is stored in non-volatile memory
67

Pulse Waveforms
Pulse Waveforms
A shown below, a pulse waveform consists of a period, a pulse width,
a rising edge, and a falling edge.
90% 90%
50% 50%
3 Pulse Width
10% 10%
Rise Time Fall Time

Period
Pulse Period
• Pulse period: 200 ns to 1000 s. The default is 1 ms.
• The specified period must be greater than the sum of the pulse width
and the edge time as shown below. The function generator will adjust
the pulse width and edge time as needed to accommodate the
specified period.
Period > Pulse Width + (1.6 X Edge Time)
• Front-Panel Operation: After selecting the pulse function, press the

Freq softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey. Then use the knob
or numeric keypad to enter the desired pulse period.
PULSe:PERiod {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
68

Pulse Waveforms
Pulse Width
The pulse width represents the time from the 50% threshold of the
rising edge of the pulse to the 50% threshold of the next falling edge.
• Pulse width: 40 ns to 1000 s (see restrictions below). The default pulse

width is 100 µs.
• The minimum pulse width (Wmin) is affected by the period.

Wmin = 40 ns for period < 10 s.
Wmin = 200 ns for period > 10 s, but < 100 s.
Wmin = 2 µs for period > 100 s, but < 1000 s.
3
• The specified pulse width must also be less than the difference
between the period and the minimum pulse width as shown below.
The function generator will adjust the pulse width as needed to
accommodate the specified period.
Pulse Width < Period – Wmin
• The specified pulse width must be less than the difference between
the period and the edge time as shown below. The function generator
will automatically adjust the pulse width as needed to accommodate
the specified period.
Pulse Width < Period – (1.6 X Edge Time)
• The pulse width must also be greater than the total time of one edge
as shown below.
Pulse Width > 1.6 X Edge Time

Width softkey. Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the
desired pulse width.
FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
69

Pulse Waveforms
Pulse Duty Cycle

The pulse duty cycle is defined as:
Duty Cycle = 100 X Pulse Width ÷ Period

where the pulse width represents the time from the 50% threshold of the
• Pulse duty cycle: 0% to 100% (see restrictions below). The default is

10%.
• The specified pulse duty cycle must conform to the following

3 restrictions determined by the minimum pulse width (Wmin).
The function generator will adjust the pulse duty cycle as needed to
accommodate the specified period.
Duty Cycle > 100 X Wmin ÷ Period
and
Duty Cycle < 100 X (1 – Wmin ÷ Period)
where:

restriction determined by the edge time. The function generator will
adjust the pulse duty cycle as needed to accommodate the specified
period.
Duty Cycle > 100 X (1.6 X Edge Time) ÷ Period
and
Duty Cycle < 100 X (1 – (1.6 X Edge Time) ÷ Period)

Dty Cyc softkey. Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the
desired duty cycle.
FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle {<percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
70

Pulse Waveforms
Edge Time
The edge time sets each edge transition time (rising and falling) of the
pulse. The rise time and fall time cannot be set independently—each is
equal to the edge time. For each transition, the edge time represents the
time from the 10% threshold to the 90% threshold.
• Edge time: 20 ns to 100 ns (see restrictions below). The default edge

time is 20 ns.
• The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse width as
shown below. The function generator will adjust the edge time as
needed to accommodate the specified pulse width.
3
Edge Time < 0.625 X Pulse Width
or in terms of duty cycle
Edge Time < 0.625 X Period X Duty Cycle ÷ 100

Edge Time softkey. Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the
desired edge time.
FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
71

Amplitude Modulation (AM)

A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a
modulating waveform. In AM, the amplitude of the carrier is varied
by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform. The function
generator will accept an internal or external modulation source.
For more information on the fundamentals of Amplitude Modulation,
refer to chapter 7, “Tutorial”.
To Select AM Modulation
3
• The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be
enabled at a time. For example, you cannot enable AM and FM at the
same time. When you enable AM, the previous modulation mode is
turned off.
• The function generator will not allow AM to be enabled at the same

time that sweep or burst is enabled. When you enable AM, the sweep
or burst mode is turned off.
• Front-Panel Operation: You must enable AM before setting up any of

the other modulation parameters. Press and then select “AM”
using the Type softkey. The AM waveform is output using the present
settings for the carrier frequency, modulating frequency, output
amplitude, and offset voltage.
• Remote Interface Operation: To avoid multiple waveform changes,

enable AM after you have set up the other modulation parameters.
AM:STATe {OFF|ON}
72

Carrier Waveform Shape

• AM carrier shape: Sine or Square waveform. The default is Sine. You
cannot use ramp, pulse, noise, dc, or arbitrary as the carrier
waveform.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press either the or the front-panel

function key.
FUNCtion {SINusoid|SQUare}
You can also use the APPLy command to select the function, frequency, 3
Carrier Frequency
The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as
shown below. The default is 1 kHz for all functions.
Sine 1 mHz 10 MHz

Square 1 mHz 10 MHz
• Front-Panel Operation: To set the carrier frequency, press the Freq

keypad to enter the desired frequency.
73

Modulating Waveform Shape

The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation
source for AM.
• Modulating waveform shape (internal source): Sine, Square Ramp,

Negative Ramp, Triangle, Noise, or Arb waveform. The default is Sine.
• Square has 50% duty cycle.
• Ramp has 100% symmetry.
• Triangle has 50% symmetry.

3 • Negative ramp has 0% symmetry.
• You can use noise as the modulating waveshape, but you cannot use
ramp, pulse, noise, dc, or arbitrary as the carrier waveform.
If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape, the
waveform is automatically limited to 4K points. Extra waveform points
are removed using decimation.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling AM, press the Shape softkey.
AM:INTernal:FUNCtion {SINusoid|SQUare|RAMP|NRAMp|
TRIangle|NOISe|USER}
74

Modulating Waveform Frequency

source for AM.
• Modulating frequency (internal source): 2 mHz to 20 kHz.

The default is 100 Hz.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling AM, press the AM Freq softkey.
AM:INTernal:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
3
Modulation Depth
The modulation depth is expressed as a percentage and represents the
extent of the amplitude variation. At 0% depth, the output amplitude is
half of the selected value. At 100% depth, the output amplitude equals
the selected value.
• Modulation depth: 0% to 120%. The default is 100%.
• Note that even at greater than 100% depth, the function generator
will not exceed ±5V peak on the output (into a 50Ω load).
• If you select the External modulating source, the carrier waveform

is modulated with an external waveform. The modulation depth is
controlled by the ±5V signal level present on the rear-panel
Modulation In connector. For example, if you have set the modulation
depth to 100%, then when the modulating signal is at +5 volts,
the output will be at the maximum amplitude. When the modulating
signal is at -5 volts, then the output will be at the minimum amplitude.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling AM, press the AM Depth

softkey. Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the depth.
AM:DEPTh {<depth in percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
75

Modulating Source
source for AM.
• Modulating source: Internal or External. The default is Internal.
• If you select the External source, the carrier waveform is modulated

with an external waveform. The modulation depth is controlled by the
±5V signal level present on the rear-panel Modulation In connector.
For example, if you have set the modulation depth to 100%, then
when the modulating signal is at +5 volts, the output will be at the
maximum amplitude. When the modulating signal is at -5 volts, then
3 the output will be at the minimum amplitude.
Modulation
In +5 V
0V
-5 V
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling AM, press the Source softkey.
AM:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
76

Frequency Modulation (FM)

A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a
modulating waveform. In FM, the frequency of the carrier is varied
by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform.
For more information on the fundamentals of Frequency Modulation,
To Select FM Modulation
• The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be 3
enabled at a time. For example, you cannot enable FM and AM at the
same time. When you enable FM, the previous modulation mode is
turned off.
• The function generator will not allow FM to be enabled at the same

time that sweep or burst is enabled. When you enable FM, the sweep
• Front-Panel Operation: You must enable FM before setting up any of

the other modulation parameters. Press and then select “FM”
using the Type softkey. The FM waveform is output using the present
settings for the carrier frequency, modulating frequency, output
amplitude, and offset voltage.

enable FM after you have set up the other modulation parameters.
FM:STATe {OFF|ON}
77

Carrier Waveform Shape

• FM carrier shape: Sine or Square waveform. The default is Sine. You
cannot use ramp, pulse, noise, dc, or arbitrary as the
carrier waveform.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press either the or the front-panel

function key.
FUNCtion {SINusoid|SQUare}
3 You can also use the APPLy command to select the function, frequency,
78

Carrier Frequency
The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as
shown below. The default is 1 kHz for all functions.
Sine 1 mHz 10 MHz

Square 1 mHz 10 MHz
• The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the

frequency deviation. If you attempt to set the deviation to a value
greater than the carrier frequency (with FM enabled), the function 3
generator will automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum
value allowed with the present carrier frequency.
• The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or
equal to the maximum frequency for the selected function plus 100 kHz
(10.1 MHz for sine and square waveforms). If you attempt to set the
deviation to a value that is not valid, the function generator will
automatically adjust it to the maximum value allowed with the
present carrier frequency.
• Front-Panel Operation: To set the carrier frequency, press the Freq

79


source for FM.
• Modulating waveform shape (internal source): Sine, Square, Ramp,


• You can use noise as the modulating waveshape, but you cannot use
use ramp, pulse, noise, dc, or arbitrary as the carrier waveform.
• If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape,

the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points. Extra waveform
points are removed using decimation.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling FM, press the Shape softkey.
FM:INTernal:FUNCtion {SINusoid|SQUare|RAMP|NRAMp|
80


source for FM.

• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling FM, press the FM Freq softkey.
FM:INTernal:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
3
81

Frequency Deviation
The frequency deviation setting represents the peak variation in
frequency of the modulated waveform from the carrier frequency.
• Frequency deviation: 1 mHz to 5 MHz. The default is 100 Hz.

deviation. If you attempt to set the deviation to a value greater than
the carrier frequency (with FM enabled), the function generator will
limit the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present
carrier frequency.
3 • The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or
deviation to a value that is not valid, the function generator will limit
it to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling FM, press the Freq Dev softkey.
Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation.
FM:DEViation {<peak deviation in Hz>|MINimum|MAXimum}
82

Modulating Source
source for FM.

with an external waveform. The frequency deviation is controlled by
the ±5V signal level present on the rear-panel Modulation In
connector. For example, if you have set the deviation to 100 kHz,
then a +5V signal level corresponds to a 100 kHz increase in frequency.
Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative
signal levels reduce the frequency below the carrier frequency. 3
Modulation
In +5 V
0V
-5 V
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling FM, press the Source softkey.
FM:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
83

Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)

In Pulse Width Modulation (PWM), the width of a pulse waveform is
varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform. The
width of the pulse can be expressed either as a pulse width (expressed in
time units, like the period) or a duty cycle (expressed as a percentage of
the period). The function generator will accept an internal or external
modulation source.
For more information on the fundamentals of Pulse Width Modulation,
3
To Select PWM Modulation
• The function generator only allows PWM to be selected for a pulse
waveform, and PWM is the only modulation type supported for pulse.
• The function generator will not allow PWM to be enabled at the same
time that sweep or burst is enabled.
• Front-Panel Operation: You must enable PWM before setting up any

of the other modulation parameters. Press to select pulse, and
then press to turn on modulation. PWM is selected as the only
modulation type supported for pulse. The PWM waveform is output
using the present settings for the pulse frequency, modulating
frequency, output amplitude, offset voltage, pulse width, and edge
time.

enable PWM after you have set up the other modulation parameters.
PWM:STATe {OFF|ON}
84

Pulse Waveform
• Pulse is the only waveform shape supported for PWM.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press .
FUNCtion {PULSe}
Pulse Period
3
The range for the pulse period is 200 ns to 1000 s. The default is 1 ms.

Freq softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey. Then use the knob
or numeric keypad to enter the desired pulse period.
85


source for PWM.
• Modulating waveform shape (internal source): Sine, Square, Ramp,


• If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape,

the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points. Extra waveform
points are removed using decimation.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling PWM, press the Shape

softkey.
PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion {SINusoid|SQUare|

source for PWM.

• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling PWM, press the PWM Freq

softkey.
PWM:INTernal:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
86

Width Deviation
The width deviation represents the variation in width (in seconds) in the
modulated waveform from the width of the original pulse waveform.
• Width deviation: 0 s to 500 s (see below). The default is 10 µs.
• The width deviation cannot exceed the current pulse width.
• The width deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width

(Wmin):
Width Deviation < Pulse Width – Wmin
and 3
Width Deviation < Period – Pulse Width – Wmin
where:
• The width deviation is limited by the current edge time setting.

Width Deviation < Pulse Width – (1.6 X Edge Time)
and
Width Deviation < Period – Pulse Width – (1.6 X Edge Time)
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling PWM, press the Width Dev

softkey. Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired
deviation.
PWM:DEViation {< deviation in seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
Note: The pulse width and width deviation, and the pulse duty cycle and
duty cycle deviation are coupled in the front panel interface. If you select
Width for the pulse waveform and enable PWM, the Width Dev softkey is
available. On the other hand, if you select Dty Cyc for the pulse waveform
and enable PWM, the Dty Cyc Dev softkey is available.
87

Duty Cycle Deviation

The duty cycle deviation represents the variation in duty cycle of the
modulated waveform from the duty cycle of the pulse waveform. The
duty cycle deviation is expressed as a percentage of the period.
• Duty cycle deviation: 0 to 100% (see below). The default is 1%.
• The duty cycle deviation cannot exceed the current pulse duty cycle.
• The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width
(Wmin):
3 Duty Cycle Deviation < Duty Cycle – 100 X Wmin ÷ Period

and
Duty Cycle Deviation < 100 – Duty Cycle – 100 X Wmin ÷ Period
where:
• The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the current edge time
setting.
Duty Cycle Dev < Duty Cycle – (160 X Edge Time) ÷ Period
and
Duty Cycle Dev < 100 – Duty Cycle – (160 X Edge Time) ÷ Period
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling PWM, press the Dty CyC Dev
deviation.
PWM:DEViation:DCYCle {< deviation in percent>|MIN|MAX}
Note: The pulse width and width deviation, and the pulse duty cycle and
duty cycle deviation are coupled in the front panel interface. If you select
Width for the pulse waveform and enable PWM, the Width Dev softkey is
available. On the other hand, if you select Dty Cyc for the pulse waveform
and enable PWM, the Dty Cyc Dev softkey is available.
88

Modulating Source
source for PWM.
• If you select the External source, the pulse waveform is modulated

with an external waveform. The width deviation or duty cycle
deviation is controlled by the ±5V signal level present on the rear-
panel Modulation In connector. For example, if you have set the duty
cycle to 10% and the duty cycle deviation to 5%, then when the
modulating signal is at +5 volts, the output will be at the maximum
duty cycle (15%). When the modulating signal is at -5 volts, the output 3
will be at the minimum duty cycle (5%).
Modulation
In +5 V
0V
-5 V
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling PWM, press the Source

softkey.
PWM:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}
89

Frequency Sweep
Frequency Sweep
In the frequency sweep mode, the function generator “steps” from the
start frequency to the stop frequency at a sweep rate which you specify.
You can sweep up or down in frequency, and with either linear or
logarithmic spacing. You can also configure the function generator to
output a single sweep (one pass from start frequency to stop frequency)
by applying an external or manual trigger. The function generator can
produce a frequency sweep for sine, square, or ramp waveforms (pulse,
noise, dc, and arbitrary are not allowed).
3 For more information on the fundamentals of a sweep, refer to chapter 7,
“Tutorial”.
To Select Sweep
• The function generator will not allow the sweep mode to be enabled
at the same time that burst or any modulation mode is enabled.
When you enable sweep, the burst or modulation mode is turned off.
• Front-Panel Operation: You must enable sweep before setting up any

of the other sweep parameters. Press to output a sweep using
the present settings for frequency, output amplitude, and offset.

enable the sweep mode after you have set up the other parameters.
SWEep:STATe {OFF|ON}
90

Frequency Sweep
Start Frequency and Stop Frequency

The start frequency and stop frequency set the upper and lower frequency
bounds for the sweep. The function generator begins at the start frequency,
sweeps to the stop frequency, and then resets back to the start frequency.
• Start and Stop frequencies: 1 mHz to 10 MHz (limited to 100 kHz for
ramp waveforms). The sweep is phase continuous over the full
frequency range. The default start frequency is 100 Hz. The default
stop frequency is 1 kHz.
• To sweep up in frequency, set the start frequency < stop frequency.

To sweep down in frequency, set the start frequency > stop frequency.
3
• For sweeps with Marker Off, the Sync signal is a square waveform
with a 50% duty cycle. The Sync signal is a TTL “high” at the
beginning of the sweep and goes “low” at the midpoint of the sweep.
The frequency of the sync waveform is equal to the specified sweep
time. The signal is output from the front-panel Sync connector.
• For sweeps with Marker On, the Sync signal is a TTL “high” at the
beginning of the sweep and goes “low” at the marker frequency.
The signal is output from the front-panel Sync connector.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling sweeps, press the Start or

Stop softkey. Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the
desired frequency.
FREQuency:STARt {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
FREQuency:STOP {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
91

Frequency Sweep
Center Frequency and Frequency Span

If desired, you can set the frequency boundaries of the sweep using a
center frequency and frequency span. These parameters are similar to the
start frequency and stop frequency (see the previous page) and are
included to give you added flexibility.
• Center frequency: 1 mHz to 10 MHz (limited to 100 kHz for ramp

waveforms). The default is 550 Hz.
• Frequency span: 0 Hz to 10 MHz (limited to 100 kHz for ramp

3 • To sweep up in frequency, set a positive frequency span.

To sweep down in frequency, set a negative frequency span.
• For sweeps with Marker Off, the Sync signal is a square waveform
with a 50% duty cycle. The Sync signal is a TTL “high” at the
beginning of the sweep and goes “low” at the midpoint of the sweep.
The frequency of the sync waveform is equal to the specified sweep
time. The signal is output from the front-panel Sync connector.
• For sweeps with Marker On, the Sync signal is a TTL “high” at the
beginning of the sweep and goes “low” at the marker frequency.
The signal is output from the front-panel Sync connector.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling sweeps, press the Start or

Stop softkey again to toggle to the Center or Span softkey. Then use
the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired values.
FREQuency:CENTer {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
FREQuency:SPAN {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
92

Frequency Sweep
Sweep Mode
You can sweep with either linear or logarithmic spacing. For a linear
sweep, the function generator varies the output frequency in a linear
fashion during the sweep. For a logarithmic sweep, the function
generator varies the output frequency in a logarithmic fashion.
• Sweep mode: Linear or Logarithmic. The default is Linear.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling sweeps, press the Linear

softkey again to toggle between the linear or log mode.

3
SWEep:SPACing {LINear|LOGarithmic}
Sweep Time
The sweep time specifies the number of seconds required to sweep from
the start frequency to the stop frequency. The number of discrete
frequency points in the sweep is automatically calculated by the function
generator and is based on the sweep time you select.
• Sweep time: 1 ms to 500 seconds. The default is 1 second.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling sweeps, press the Sweep Time

sweep time.
SWEep:TIME {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
93

Frequency Sweep
Marker Frequency
If desired, you can set the frequency at which the signal on the front-
panel Sync connector goes to a logic low during the sweep. The Sync
signal always goes from low to high at the beginning of the sweep.
• Marker frequency: 1 mHz to 10 MHz (limited to 100 kHz for ramp

• When the sweep mode is enabled, the marker frequency must be

between the specified start frequency and stop frequency. If you
attempt to set the marker frequency to a frequency not in this range,
the function generator will automatically set the marker frequency
3 equal to the start frequency or stop frequency (whichever is closer).
• The Sync enable setting is overridden by enabling the marker used

with the sweep mode (see page 66). Therefore, when the marker is
enabled (and the sweep mode is also enabled), the Sync setting is
ignored.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling sweeps, press the Marker

marker frequency.
MARKer:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
MARKer {Off|On}
94

Frequency Sweep
Sweep Trigger Source

In the sweep mode, the function generator outputs a single sweep when a
trigger signal is received. After one sweep from the start frequency to the
stop frequency, the function generator waits for the next trigger while
outputting the start frequency.
• Sweep trigger source: Internal, External, or Manual. The default

is Internal.
• When the Internal (immediate) source is selected, the function

generator outputs a continuous sweep at a rate determined by the
sweep time specified.
3
• When an External source is selected, the function generator will
accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear panel Trig In connector.
The function generator initiates one sweep each time Trig In receives
a TTL pulse with the specified polarity.
• The trigger period must be greater than or equal to the specified

sweep time plus 1 ms.
• When the Manual source is selected, the function generator outputs

one sweep each time the front-panel key is pressed.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press the Trigger Setup softkey and then

select the desired source by pressing the Source softkey.
To specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or

falling edge of the Trig In connector, press the Trigger Setup softkey.
Then select the desired edge by pressing the Slope softkey.
TRIGger:SOURce {IMMediate|EXTernal|BUS}
Use the following command to specify whether the function generator

triggers on the rising or falling edge of the signal on the Trig In
connector.
TRIGger:SLOPe (POSitive|NEGative}
See “Triggering” on page 106 for more information.
95

Frequency Sweep
Trigger Out Signal

A “trigger out” signal is provided on the rear-panel Trig Out connector
(used with sweep and burst only). When enabled, a TTL-compatible
square waveform with either a rising edge (default) or falling edge is
output from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep.
• When the Internal (immediate) trigger source is selected, the function

generator outputs a square waveform with a 50% duty cycle from the
Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep. The frequency of
the waveform is equal to the specified sweep time.
• When the External trigger source is selected, the function generator

3 automatically disables the “trigger out” signal. The Trig Out
connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time (an
externally-triggered waveform uses the same connector to trigger the
sweep).
• When the Manual trigger source is selected, the function generator

outputs a pulse (>1 µs pulse width) from the Trig Out connector at the
beginning of each sweep or burst.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling sweeps, press the

Trigger Setup softkey. Then select the desired edge by pressing
the Trig Out softkey.
OUTPut:TRIGger:SLOPe {POSitive|NEGative}
OUTPut:TRIGger {OFF|ON}
96

Burst Mode
Burst Mode
specified number of cycles, called a burst. The function generator can
produce a burst using sine, square, or ramp waveforms (pulse, noise, dc,
and arbitrary waveforms are not allowed).
For more information on the fundamentals of the burst mode, refer to
chapter 7, “Tutorial”.
To Select Burst
3
• The function generator will not allow burst to be enabled at the same
time that sweep or any modulation mode is enabled. When you enable
burst, the sweep or modulation mode is turned off.
• Front-Panel Operation: You must enable burst before setting up any

of the other burst parameters. Press to output a burst using the
present settings for frequency, output amplitude, and offset voltage.

enable the burst mode after you have set up the other parameters.
BURSt:STATe {OFF|ON}
97

Burst Mode
Burst Type
You can use burst in one of two modes as described below. The function
generator enables one burst mode at a time based on the trigger source
and burst source that you select (see the table below).
• Triggered Burst Mode: In this mode (also called N Cycle Burst), the
function generator outputs a waveform with a specified number of
cycles (burst count) each time a trigger is received. After the specified
number of cycles have been output, the function generator stops and
waits for the next trigger. You can configure the function generator to
use an internal trigger to initiate the burst, or you can provide an
3 external (manual) trigger by pressing the front-panel key,
applying a trigger signal to the rear-panel Trig In connector, or by
sending a software trigger command from the remote interface.
• External Gated Burst Mode: In this mode, the output waveform is

either “on” or “off ” based on the level of the external signal applied to
the rear-panel Trig In connector. When the gate signal is true, the
function generator outputs a continuous waveform. When the gate
signal goes false, the current waveform cycle is completed and then
the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level
corresponding to the starting burst phase of the selected waveform.
Burst Mode Burst Count Burst Period Burst Phase Trigger Source
(BURS:MODE) (BURS:NCYC) (BURS:INT:PER) (BURS:PHAS) (TRIG:SOUR)
Triggered Burst Mode:

TRIGgered Available Available Available IMMediate
Internal Trigger

TRIGgered Available Not Used Available EXTernal, BUS
External Trigger
Gated Burst Mode:

GATed Not Used Not Used Available Not Used
External Trigger
98

Burst Mode
• When the gated mode is selected, the burst count, burst period, and
trigger source are ignored (these parameters are used for the
triggered burst mode only). If a manual trigger is received, it is
ignored, and no error will be generated.
• When the gated mode is selected, you can also select the polarity of
the signal on the rear-panel Trig In connector.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling bursts, press the N Cycle

(triggered) or Gated softkey.
To select the polarity of the external gate signal on the Trig In

connector, press the Polarity softkey. The default polarity is POS
(true-high logic). 3
BURSt:MODE {TRIGgered|GATed}
• Use the following command to select the polarity of the external gate
signal on the Trig In connector. The default if NORM (true-high
logic).
BURST:GATE:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}
99

Burst Mode
Waveform Frequency
The waveform frequency defines the repetition rate of the burst waveform
in the triggered and external gated modes. In the triggered mode, the
number of cycles specified by the burst count is output at the waveform
frequency. In the external gated mode, the waveform frequency is output
when the external gate signal is true.
Keep in mind that the waveform frequency is different than the “burst
period” which specifies the interval between bursts (triggered mode only).
• Waveform frequency: 1 mHz to 10 MHz (limited to 100 kHz for ramp

waveforms). The default waveform frequency is 1 kHz. (For an
3 internally triggered burst waveform, the minimum frequency is 2.001
mHz.) You can select a sine, square, or ramp waveform (pulse, noise,
dc, and arbitrary waveforms are not allowed).
• For sine and square waveforms, frequencies above 3 MHz are allowed
only with an “infinite” burst count.
• Front-Panel Operation: To set the waveform frequency, press the

Freq softkey for the selected function. Then use the knob or numeric
100

Burst Mode
Burst Count
The burst count defines the number of cycles to be output per burst.
Used in the triggered burst mode only (internal or external source)
• Burst count: 1 to 50,000 cycles, in 1 cycle increments. You can also

select an infinite burst count. The default is 1 cycle.
• When the Internal trigger source is selected, the specified number of

cycles is output continuously at a rate determined by the burst period
setting. The burst period defines the interval between bursts.
• When the Internal trigger source is selected, the burst count must be
less than the product of the burst period and the waveform frequency 3
as shown below.
Burst Count < Burst Period X Waveform Frequency
• The function generator will automatically increase the burst period

up to its maximum value to accommodate the specified burst count
(but the waveform frequency will not be changed).
• When the gated burst mode is selected, the burst count is ignored.
However, if you change the burst count from the remote interface
while in the gated mode, the function generator remembers the new
count and will use it when the triggered mode is selected.
• Front-Panel Operation: To set the burst count, press the #Cycles

softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the count.
To select an infinite count burst instead, press the #Cycles softkey
again to toggle to the Infinite softkey (press once to start the
waveform, and a second time to stop it).
BURSt:NCYCles {<# cycles>|INFinity|MINimum|MAXimum}
101

Burst Mode
Burst Period
The burst period defines time from the start of one burst to the start of
the next burst. Used in the internal triggered burst mode only.
Keep in mind that burst period is different than the “waveform frequency”
which specifies the frequency of the bursted signal.
• Burst period: 1 µs to 500 seconds. The default is 10 ms.
• The burst period setting is used only when Internal triggering is

enabled. The burst period is ignored when manual or external
triggering is enabled (or when the gated burst mode is selected.).
3 • It is not possible to specify a burst period which is too short for the
function generator to output with the specified burst count and
frequency (see below). If the burst period is too short, the function
generator will automatically adjust it as needed to continuously
re-trigger the burst.
Burst Count
Burst Period > ----------------------------------------------------------- + 200 ns
Waveform Frequency
• Front-Panel Operation: To set the burst period, press the Burst Period
softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the period.
BURSt:INTernal:PERiod {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
102

Burst Mode
Burst Phase
The burst phase defines the starting phase of the burst.
• Burst phase: -360 degrees to +360 degrees. The default is 0 degrees.
• From the remote interface, you can set the starting phase in degrees
or radians using the UNIT:ANGL command (see page 158).
• From the front panel, the starting phase is always displayed in degrees
(radians are not available). If you set the starting phase in radians
from the remote interface and then return to front-panel operation, you
will see that the function generator converts the phase to degrees.
• For sine, square, and ramp waveforms, 0 degrees is the point at which
3
the waveform crosses zero volts (or the dc offset value) in a positive-
going direction.
• The burst phase is also used in the gated burst mode. Then the gate
the function generator stops. The output will remain at the voltage
level corresponding to the starting burst phase.
• Front-Panel Operation: To set the burst phase, press the Start Phase
softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired
phase in degrees.
BURSt:PHASe {<angle>|MINimum|MAXimum}
103

Burst Mode
Burst Trigger Source

In the triggered burst mode, the function generator outputs a burst
with the specified number of cycles (burst count) each time a trigger is
received. After the specified number of cycles have been output,
the function generator stops and waits for the next trigger. At power-on,
the internally-triggered burst mode is enabled.
• Burst trigger source: Internal, External, or Manual. The default

is Internal.
• When the Internal (immediate) source is selected, the frequency at

which the burst is generated is determined by the burst period.
3
• When the External source is selected, the function generator will
accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear-panel Trig In connector.
The function generator outputs the specified number of cycles each
time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the specified polarity.
External trigger signals that occur during a burst are ignored.
• When the Manual source is selected, the function generator outputs

one burst each time the front-panel key is pressed.
• When the External or Manual trigger source is selected, the burst

count and burst phase remain in effect but the burst period is ignored.

select the desired source by pressing the Source softkey.

falling edge of the signal on the Trig In connector, press the Trigger
Setup softkey. Then select the desired edge by pressing the Slope
softkey.

triggers on the rising or falling edge of the Trig In connector.
TRIGger:SLOPe {POSitive|NEGative}
See “Triggering” on page 106 for more information on triggering.
104

Burst Mode
Trigger Out Signal

(used with sweep only). When enabled, a TTL-compatible pulse waveform
with either a rising edge (default) or falling edge is output from the Trig
Out connector at the beginning of the burst.
• When the Internal (immediate) trigger source is selected the function

generator outputs a square waveform with a 50% duty cycle from the
Trig Out connector at the beginning of the burst. The frequency of the
waveform is equal to the specified burst period.
• When the Manual trigger source is selected, the function generator

outputs a pulse (>1 µs pulse width) from the Trig Out connector at the 3
beginning of each burst.

automatically disables the “trigger out” signal. The Trig Out
burst).
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling bursts, press the Trigger Setup

softkey. Then select the desired edge by pressing the Trig Out softkey.
105

Triggering
Triggering
Applies to sweep and burst only. You can issue triggers for sweeps or
bursts using internal triggering, external triggering, or manual triggering.
• Internal or “automatic” triggering is enabled when you turn on the

function generator. In this mode, the function generator outputs
continuously when the sweep or burst mode is selected.
• External triggering uses the rear-panel Trig In connector to control

the sweep or burst. The function generator initiates one sweep or
3 outputs one burst each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse. You can
select whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling
edge of the external trigger signal.
• Manual triggering initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time
you press from the front-panel. Continue pressing this key to
re-trigger the function generator.
• The key is disabled when in remote and when a function other

than burst or sweep is currently selected.
Trigger Source Choices

Applies to sweep and burst only. You must specify the source from which
the function generator will accept a trigger.
• Sweep trigger source: Internal, External, or Manual. The default

is Internal.
• The function generator will accept a manual trigger, a hardware

trigger from the rear-panel Trig In connector, or continuously output
sweeps or bursts using an internal trigger. At power-on, internal
trigger is selected.
106

Triggering
• The trigger source setting is stored in volatile memory; the source is

set to internal trigger (front panel) or immediate (remote interface)
when power has been off or after a remote interface reset. (Provided
that the Power On state is set to Default.)
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling sweeps or bursts, press the

Trigger Setup softkey. Then select the desired source by pressing the
Source softkey.
The APPLy command automatically sets the source to Immediate.

3
Internal Triggering In the internal trigger mode, the function generator

continuously outputs the sweep or burst (as specified by the sweep time
or burst period). This is the default trigger source for both front-panel
and remote interface use.

select the Source Int softkey.
TRIGger:SOURce IMMediate
107

Triggering
External Triggering In the external trigger mode, the function

generator will accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear-panel
Trig In connector. The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs
one burst each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the specified edge.
See also “Trigger Input Signal” on the following page.
• Front-Panel Operation: The external trigger mode is like the manual

trigger mode except that you apply the trigger to the Trig In connector.
To select the external source, press the Trigger Setup softkey and
then select the Source Ext softkey.

3 falling edge, press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the
desired edge by pressing the Slope softkey.
TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal

triggers on the rising or falling edge.
Manual Triggering In the manual trigger mode (front panel only),

you can manually trigger the function generator by pressing the front-
panel key. The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs
one burst for each time you press the key. The key is illuminated
while the function generator is waiting for a manual trigger (the key is
disabled when in remote).
108

Triggering
Software (Bus) Triggering The bus trigger mode is available only

from the remote interface. This mode is similar to the manual trigger
mode from the front panel, but you trigger the function generator by
sending a bus trigger command. The function generator initiates one
sweep or outputs one burst each time a bus trigger command is received.
• To select the bus trigger source, send the following command.
TRIGger:SOURce BUS
• To trigger the function generator from the remote interface (GPIB,

USB, or LAN) when the Bus source selected, send the TRIG or *TRG
(trigger) command. The front-panel key is illuminated when the 3
function generator is waiting for a bus trigger.
109

Triggering
Trigger Input Signal
INPUT
Ext Trig
+2.5 to 5V
>100 ns
0V
Rising edge shown.
3 This rear-panel connector is used in the following modes:
• Triggered Sweep Mode: To select the external source, press the

Trigger Setup softkey and then select the Source Ext softkey or
execute the TRIG:SOUR EXT command from the remote interface
(sweep must be enabled). When the rising or falling edge (you specify
which edge) of a TTL pulse is received on the Trig In connector,
the function generator outputs a single sweep.
• Triggered Burst Mode: To select the external source, press the

Trigger Setup softkey and then select the Source Ext softkey or
execute the TRIG:SOUR EXT command from the remote interface
(burst must be enabled). The function generator outputs a waveform
with a specified number of cycles (burst count) each time a trigger is
received from the specified trigger source.
• External Gated Burst Mode: To enable the gated mode, press the
Gated softkey or execute the BURS:MODE GAT command from the
remote interface (burst must be enabled). When the external gate
signal is true, the function generator outputs a continuous waveform.
When the external gate signal goes false, the current waveform cycle
is completed and then the function generator stops while remaining
at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase.
110

Triggering
Trigger Output Signal

(used with sweep and burst only). When enabled, a TTL-compatible
square waveform with either a rising edge (default) or falling edge is
output from the rear-panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the
sweep or burst.
OUTPUT
Ext Trig +3 V
>1 µs
3
0V
Rising edge shown.
• When the Internal (immediate) trigger source is selected, the function

generator outputs a square waveform with a 50% duty cycle from
the Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep or burst.
The period of the waveform is equal to the specified sweep time or
burst period.

automatically disables the “trigger out” signal. The Trig Out
sweep or burst).
• When the Bus (software) or manual trigger source is selected, the

function generator outputs a pulse (>1 µs pulse width) from the
Trig Out connector at the beginning of each sweep or burst.
• Front-Panel Operation: After enabling sweeps or burst, press the

Trigger Setup softkey. Then select the desired edge by pressing the
Trig Out softkey.
111

Optional Arbitrary Waveforms (Option 002)

There are five built-in arbitrary waveforms stored in non-volatile memory.
You can also store up to four user-defined waveforms in non-volatile
memory in addition to one in volatile memory. Each waveform can
contain between 1 (a dc voltage) and 8,192 (8K) data points.
You can create an arbitrary waveform from the front panel as described
3 in the following section, or you can use the Agilent IntuiLink software
provided on the CD-ROM included with the Agilent 33210A. The Agilent
IntuiLink software allows you to create arbitrary waveforms using a
graphical user interface on your PC, and then download them into the
Agilent 33210A. You can also capture waveforms from your Agilent
oscilloscope and import them into IntuiLink. Please see the online help
included with the Agilent IntuiLink software for further information.
Note. You can download waveforms of up to 8,192 (8K) data points into
the Agilent 33210A from your PC.
Refer to chapter 7, “Tutorial”, for more information on the internal
operation of downloading and outputting an arbitrary waveform.
112

To Create and Store an Arbitrary Waveform

This section gives an example which shows you how to create and store
an arbitrary waveform from the front panel. To download an arbitrary
waveform from the remote interface, see Arbitrary Waveform Commands
starting on page 222. For this example, you will create and store the
ramp waveform shown below using four waveform points.
Volt/Div = 1 Volt
Time/Div = 1 ms
2
3 3
4
1
1 Select the arbitrary waveform function.

When you press to select the arbitrary function, a temporary
message is displayed indicating which waveform is currently selected.
2 Start the arbitrary waveform editor.

Press the Create New softkey to start the waveform editor. While in the
waveform editor, you define the waveform by specifying time and voltage
values for each point in the waveform. When creating a new waveform,
the previous waveform in volatile memory is overwritten.
3 Set the waveform period.

Press the Cycle Period softkey to set the time boundaries for the
waveform. The time value of the last point that can be defined in the
waveform must be less than the specified cycle period.
For this example, set the period of the waveform to 10 ms.
113

4 Set the waveform voltage limits.

Press the High V Limit and Low V Limit softkeys to set the upper and
lower voltage levels that can be reached while editing the waveform.
The upper limit must be greater than the lower limit. By default,
Point #1 is set equal to the upper limit and Point #2 is set equal to the
lower limit.
For this example, set the upper limit to 3.0 V and the lower limit to 0 V.
3
5 Select the interpolation method.
Press the Interp softkey to enable or disable linear interpolation between
waveform points (this feature is available from the front panel only).
With interpolation enabled (default), the waveform editor makes a
straight-line connection between points. With interpolation disabled,
the waveform editor maintains a constant voltage level between points
and creates a “step-like” waveform.
For this example, turn on linear interpolation.
6 Set the initial number of waveform points.

The waveform editor initially builds a waveform with two points and
automatically connects the last point of the waveform to the voltage level
of the first point to create a continuous waveform. Press the Init # Points
softkey to specify the initial number of waveform points (you can add or
remove points later if necessary).
For this example, set the initial number of points to “4”.
114

7 Start the point-by-point editing process.

Press the Edit Points softkey to accept the initial waveform settings and
begin point-by-point editing. The status line at the top of the display
window shows the point number at the left, the time value of the current
point in the center, and the voltage value of the current point to the right.
8 Define the first waveform point.

Press the Voltage softkey to set the voltage level for Point #1 (this point
is fixed at a time of 0 seconds). By default, Point #1 is set equal to the
upper limit.
For this example, set the voltage level of Point #1 to 0 V. 3
The waveform editor performs all amplitude calculations using Vpp,

rather than Vrms or dBm.
9 Define the next waveform point.

Press the Point # softkey and then turn the knob to move to Point #2.
Press the Time softkey to set the time for the current point (this softkey
is not available for Point #1). Press the Voltage softkey to set the voltage
level for the current point.
For this example, set the time to 2 ms and the voltage level to 3.0 V.
115

10 Define the remaining waveform points.

Using the Time and Voltage softkeys, define the remaining waveform
points using the values shown in the table below.
Point Time Value Voltage Value

1 0s 0V
2 2 ms 3V
3 4 ms 1V
4 7 ms 0V
3 • The time value of the last point that can be defined in the waveform
must be less than the specified cycle period.
• The waveform editor automatically connects the last waveform point

to the voltage level of first point to create a continuous waveform.
• To insert additional points after the current waveform point, press

the Insert Point softkey. The new point is inserted midway between
the current point and the next defined point.
• To remove the current waveform point, press the Remove Point

softkey. The remaining points are joined using the interpolation
method currently selected. You cannot remove Point #1 since the
waveform must have a defined initial value.
116

11 Store the arbitrary waveform in memory.

Press the End / Store softkey to store the new waveform in memory.
Then press the DONE softkey to store the waveform in volatile memory
or press the Store in Non-Vol softkey to store the waveform in one of four
non-volatile memory locations.
You can assign a custom name to the four non-volatile memory locations.
• The custom name can contain up to 12 characters. The first character

must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters, numbers,
or the underscore character (“ _ ”).

3
• To delete all characters to the right of the cursor, press the key.
For this example, assign the name “RAMP_NEW” to memory location 1
and then press the STORE ARB softkey to store the waveform.
The waveform is now stored in non-volatile memory and is currently

being output from the function generator. The name that you used to
store the waveform should now appear in the list of stored waveforms
(under the Stored Wform softkey).
117

Additional Information on Arbitrary Waveforms

• As a shortcut to determine which arbitrary waveform is selected,
press . A temporary message is displayed on the front panel.
• You cannot edit any of the five built-in arbitrary waveforms.
• Press the Edit Wform softkey to edit any of the arbitrary waveforms
stored in non-volatile memory or the waveform currently stored in
volatile memory. While editing an existing waveform, note the
following interactions.
• If you increase the cycle period, some points could potentially

3 match existing points. The waveform editor will preserve the
earliest points and remove all duplicates.
• If you decrease the cycle period, the waveform editor will remove
all points that were previously defined beyond the new period.
• If you increase the voltage limits, there will be no change in the

voltage levels of any existing points but there may be some loss of
vertical resolution.
• If you decrease the voltage limits, some of the existing points could
potentially exceed the new limits. The waveform editor will reduce
the voltage levels of such points to equal the new limits.
• If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape for

AM, FM, or PWM, the waveform is automatically limited to 4K
points. Extra waveform points are removed using decimation.
118

System-Related Operations
This section gives information on topics such as instrument state
storage, power-down recall, error conditions, self test, and front-panel
display control. This information is not directly related to waveform
generation but is an important part of operating the function generator.
Instrument State Storage

The function generator has five storage locations in non-volatile memory
to store instrument states. The locations are numbered 0 through 4.
The function generator automatically uses location “0” to hold the state 3
of the instrument at power down. You can also assign a user-defined
name to each of the locations (1 through 4) for use from the front panel.
• You can store the instrument state in any of the five storage locations.
However, you can only recall a state from a location that contains a
previously-stored state.
• From the remote interface only, you can use storage location “0” to
store a fifth instrument state (you cannot store to this location from
the front panel). However, note that location “0” is automatically
overwritten when power is cycled (the instrument state previously
stored will be overwritten).
• The state storage feature “remembers” the selected function

(including arbitrary waveforms), frequency, amplitude, dc offset,
duty cycle, symmetry, as well as any modulation parameters in use.
• When shipped from the factory, storage locations “1” through “4”
are empty (location “0” contains the power-down state).
• When power is turned off, the function generator automatically stores

its state in storage location “0”. You can configure the function
generator to automatically recall the power-down state when power
is restored. However, when shipped from the factory, the function
generator is configured to automatically recall the factory default
state at power-on.
119

• You can assign a custom name to each of the storage locations

(however, you cannot name location “0” from the front panel).
You can name a location from the front panel or over the remote
interface, but you can only recall a state by name from the front
panel. From the remote interface, you can only recall a stored state
using a number (0 through 4).

be a letter (A-Z), but the remaining characters can be letters,
numbers (0-9), or the underscore character (“ _ ”). Blank spaces are
not allowed. An error will be generated if you specify a name with
more than 12 characters.
3 • The function generator will not prevent you from assigning the same
custom name to different storage locations. For example, you can
assign the same name to locations “1” and “2”.
• If you delete an arbitrary waveform from non-volatile memory after

storing the instrument state, the waveform data is lost and the
function generator will not output the waveform when the state is
recalled. The built-in “exponential rise” waveform is output in place of
the deleted waveform.
• The front-panel display state (see “Display Control” on page 125)

is saved when you store the instrument state. When you recall the
state, the front-panel display will return to the previous state.
• An instrument reset does not affect the configurations stored in

memory. Once a state is stored, it remains until it is overwritten or
specifically deleted.
120

• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the Store State or

Recall State softkey. To delete a stored state, select the Delete State
softkey (also removes the custom name for this memory location).
To configure the function generator to recall the factory default state

at power-on, press and then select the Pwr-On Default softkey.
To configure the function generator to recall the power-down state
when power is restored, press and select the Pwr-On Last softkey.
You can assign a custom name to each of the four storage locations.
• The custom name can contain up to 12 characters. The first

character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be 3
letters, numbers, or the underscore character (“ _ ”).

• To delete all characters to the right of the cursor, press the key.
*SAV {0|1|2|3|4} State 0 is the instrument state at power down.

*RCL {0|1|2|3|4} States 1, 2, 3, and 4 are user-defined states.
To assign a custom name to a stored state to be recalled from the

front panel, send the following command. From the remote interface,
you can only recall a stored state using a number (0 through 4).
MEM:STATE:NAME 1,TEST_WFORM_1
To configure the function generator to automatically recall the power-

down state when power is restored, send the following command.
MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO ON
121

Error Conditions
A record of up to 20 command syntax or hardware errors can be stored in
the function generator’s error queue. See chapter 5 for a complete listing
of the errors.
• Errors are retrieved in first-in-first-out (FIFO) order. The first error

returned is the first error that was stored. Errors are cleared as you
read them. The function generator beeps once each time an error
is generated (unless you have disabled the beeper).
• If more than 20 errors have occurred, the last error stored in the
queue (the most recent error) is replaced with “Queue overflow”.
3 No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the
queue. If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue,
the function generator responds with “No error”.
• The error queue is cleared by the *CLS (clear status) command or

when the power is cycled. The errors are also cleared when you read
the error queue. The error queue is not cleared by an instrument
reset (*RST command).
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the topic entitled

“View the remote command error queue” (topic number 2). Then press
the SELECT softkey to view the errors in the error queue. As shown
below, the first error in the list (i.e., the error at the top of the list) is
the first error that was generated.
SYSTem:ERRor? Reads one error from the error queue
Errors have the following format (the error string may contain up to
255 characters).
-113,"Undefined header"
122

Beeper Control
Normally, the function generator will emit a tone when an error is
generated from the front-panel or over the remote interface. You may
want to disable the front-panel beeper for certain applications.
• The beeper state is stored in non-volatile memory and does not

change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset.
When shipped from the factory, the beeper is enabled.
• Turning off the beeper does not disable the key click generated when
you press a front-panel key or turn the knob.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the Beep softkey 3

from the “System” menu.
SYSTem:BEEPer Issue a single beep immediately

SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe {OFF|ON} Disable/enable beeper
Display Bulb-Saver
The front-panel display bulb will normally turn off and the screen will go
blank after 8 hours of inactivity. For certain applications, you may want
to disable the bulb-saver feature. This feature is available from the
front panel only.
• The bulb-saver setting is stored in non-volatile memory and does not

When shipped from the factory, the bulb-saver mode is enabled.
• Front-Panel Operation: First press . From the “System” menu,

press Display Options, then press Scrn Svr (screen saver).
123

Display Contrast
To optimize the readability of the front-panel display, you can adjust the
contrast setting. This feature is available from the front panel only.
• Display contrast: 15 to 50. The default is 30.
• The contrast setting is stored in non-volatile memory and does not

• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the Display Contr

softkey from the “System” menu.
3
Self-Test
• A power-on self-test occurs automatically when you turn on the
function generator. This limited test assures you that the function
generator is operational.
• A complete self-test runs a series of tests and takes approximately

15 seconds to execute. If all tests pass, you can have high confidence
that the function generator is fully operational.
• If the complete self-test is successful, “Self-Test Passed” is displayed

on the front panel. If the self-test fails, “Self-Test Failed” is displayed
and an error number is shown. See the Agilent 33210A Service Guide
for instructions on returning the instrument to Agilent for service.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the Self Test

softkey from the “Test / Cal” menu.
*TST?
Returns “0” if the self-test passes or “1” if it fails. If the self-test fails,
an error message is also generated with additional information on
why the test failed.
124

Display Control
For security reasons, or to speed up the rate at which the function
generator can execute commands from the remote interface, you may
want to turn off the front-panel display. From the remote interface,
you can also display a 12-character message on the front panel.
• You can only disable the front-panel display by sending a command

from the remote interface (you cannot disable the front panel while in
local operation).
• When disabled, the front-panel display is blanked (however, the bulb

used to backlight the display remains enabled). All keys except
are locked out when the display is disabled. 3
• Sending a message to the front-panel display from the remote interface
overrides the display state. This means that you can display a
message even if the display is currently disabled (remote interface
errors are always displayed even if the display is disabled).
• The display is automatically enabled when power is cycled, after an

instrument reset (*RST command), or when you return to local
(front panel) operation. Press the key or execute the IEEE-488
GTL (Go To Local) command from the remote interface to return to
the local state.
• The display state is saved when you store the instrument state using
*SAV command. When you recall the instrument state using *RCL
command, the front-panel display will return to the previous state.
• You can display a text message on the front panel by sending a

command from the remote interface. You can use upper- or lower-case
letters (A-Z), numbers (0-9), and any other character on a standard
computer keyboard. Depending on the number of characters that you
specify, the function generator will choose one of two font sizes to
display the message. You can display approximately 12 characters in
a large font and approximately 40 characters in a small font.
125

• Remote Interface Operation: The following command turns off the

front-panel display.
DISP OFF
The following command displays a message on the front panel and

turns on the display if currently disabled.
DISP:TEXT 'Test in Progress...'
To clear the message displayed on the front panel (without changing

the display state), send the following command.
3
DISP:TEXT CLEAR
Number Format
The function generator can show numbers on the front-panel display
with periods or commas for the decimal point and digits separator.
This feature is available from the front panel only.
Decimal Point: Period Decimal Point: Comma

Digits Separator: Comma Digits Separator: None
• The number format is stored in non-volatile memory and does not

When shipped from the factory, a period is used for the decimal point
and commas are used for the digits separator (e.g., 1.000,000,00 kHz).
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the Number Format

softkey from the “System” menu.
126

Firmware Revision Query

You can query the function generator to determine which revision of
firmware is currently installed. The revision code contains five numbers
in the form “f.ff-b.bb-aa-p”.
f.ff = Firmware revision number

b.bb = Boot kernel revision number
aa = ASIC revision number
p = Printed circuit board revision number
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the Cal Info softkey 3
from the “Test / Cal” menu. The revision code is listed as one of the
messages on the front-panel display.
• Remote Interface Operation: Use the following command to read the

function generator’s firmware revision numbers (be sure to dimension
a string variable with at least 50 characters).
*IDN?
This command returns a string in the form:
Agilent Technologies,33210A,0,f.ff-b.bb-aa-p
SCPI Language Version Query

The function generator complies with the rules and conventions of the
present version of SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable
Instruments). You can determine the SCPI version with which the
instrument is in compliance by sending a query from the remote interface.
You cannot query the SCPI version from the front panel.
SYSTem:VERSion?
Returns a string in the form “YYYY.V”, where “YYYY” represents the

year of the version, and “V” represents a version number for that year
(e.g., 1999.0).
127

Remote Interface Configuration

This section gives information on configuring the function generator for
remote interface communication. For information on configuring the
instrument from the front panel, see “To Configure the Remote Interface”
starting on page 46. For information on the SCPI commands available to
program the function generator over the remote interface, see chapter 4,
Remote Interface Reference, starting on page 145.
The Agilent 33210A supports remote interface communication using a
choice of three interfaces: GPIB, USB, and LAN. All three interfaces are
3 "live" at power up. This section describes some interface configuration
parameters that you may need to set on your function generator.
• GPIB Interface. You need only set the GPIB address for the
function generator and connect it to your PC using a GPIB cable.
• USB Interface. There is nothing to configure on your function

generator. Just connect the function generator to the PC with a USB
cable.
• LAN Interface. By default, DHCP is On, which may enable network

communication over the LAN interface. You may need to set several
configuration parameters as described in the LAN configuration
sections that follow.
Connectivity Software and Product CDs

The Agilent 33210A is shipped with two CDs:
• Agilent Automation-Ready CD: This CD contains the Agilent IO

Libraries Suite software, which must be installed to enable remote-
interface operations. The CD auto-starts and provides information on
installing the software. Refer to the Agilent Technologies USB/LAN/
GPIB Connectivity Guide, which is provided on this CD-ROM, for
additional background information.
• Agilent 33210A Product-Reference CD: This CD contains the

33210A instrument drivers, the Agilent Intuilink Waveform Editor
software, the complete set of Agilent 33210A product manuals, and
programming examples. The CD auto-starts and provides a Welcome
page with instructions.
128

GPIB Configuration
Each device on the GPIB (IEEE-488) interface must have a unique address.
You can set the function generator’s address to any value between 0 and
30. The address is set to “10” when the function generator is shipped
from the factory. The GPIB address is displayed at power-on.
• The address is stored in non-volatile memory and does not change

when power has been off or after a remote interface reset.
• Your computer’s GPIB interface card has its own address. Be sure
to avoid using the computer’s address for any instrument on the
interface bus.
3
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the I/O softkey.
The GPIB Address field appears. Use the knob and cursor keys, or
the numeric keypad, to change the address.

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess <address>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess?
LAN Configuration
The following sections describe the primary LAN configuration functions
that you can set from the 33210A front-panel Utility menu. SCPI
commands are listed where applicable. In addition, there are some LAN
configuration functions that can be performed only by using the SCPI
commands. For a complete listing of the LAN configuration commands,
refer to Chapter 4, “Interface Configuration Commands” starting on page
242.
Note: If you change any LAN settings, you must cycle the power to
activate the new settings. This is true for all LAN settings, including
turning DHCP and Auto IP on or off.
Resetting the LAN You can return the LAN settings to the default
values and restart the LAN at any time with the Reset LAN feature:
• Front panel operation: Press and press the I/O softkey. Select
LAN, then Modify Settings, followed by Reset LAN. The message
“Restarting LAN” is displayed while the LAN is reset.
• There is no SCPI command to reset the LAN.
129

DHCP On/Off (LAN) DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is

a protocol for automatically assigning a dynamic IP address to a device
on a network. DHCP is typically the easiest way to configure your
Agilent 33210A for remote communication using the LAN interface.
• Select DHCP On to use DHCP to automatically assign an IP address.
• The DHCP setting is stored in non-volatile memory and does not

LAN, then Modify Settings, followed by IP Setup. By default, DHCP
is On. Press the DHCP On/Off softkey to toggle its state.
3
• There is no SCPI command to set DHCP On/Off.
Auto IP On/Off (LAN) Auto IP is another protocol for automatically

assigning a dynamic IP address to a device on a network. Typically,
AutoIP will attempt to assign an IP address if DHCP cannot.
• Select Auto IP On to use Auto IP to automatically assign an IP

address.
• If both DHCP and Auto IP fail to assign a valid IP address, the

currently configured static IP Address will be used
• The Auto IP setting is stored in non-volatile memory and does not

LAN, then Modify Settings, followed by IP Setup. By default, Auto IP
is On. Press the Auto IP On/Off softkey to toggle its state.
• Remote interface operation:

SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:AUTOip[:STATe] {OFF|0|ON|1}
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:AUTOip[:STATe]?
Note: If you want to set an IP address, Subnet Mask, or Default Gateway

manually, you must turn off both DHCP and Auto IP. Then change the
IP setup as described in the following sections.
130

IP Address (LAN) You can enter a static IP address for the 33210A as
a four-byte integer expressed in dot notation ("nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn", where
"nnn" in each case is a byte value from 0 to 255). Each byte is expressed
as a decimal value, with no leading zeros (for example, 169.254.2.20).
• You need not enter an IP address if DHCP or Auto IP is in use.

However, If both DHCP and Auto IP fail to assign a valid IP address,
the currently configured static IP Address is used.
• Contact your network administrator for a valid IP address to use for

your function generator.
• Enter the IP address using the numeric keypad (not the knob).
3
• The IP address is stored in non-volatile memory and does not change
and Auto IP are On. Select DHCP Off and Auto IP Off. The IP
Address field appears. Enter the desired address (for example:
169.254.11.22).
• Remote interface operation:

SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress <address>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress?
More About Dot Notation: Dot-notation addresses ("nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn" where "nnn"

is a byte value) must be expressed with care, as most web software on the PC will
interpret byte values with leading zeros as octal numbers. For example,
"255.255.020.011" is actually equivalent to decimal "255.255.16.9" not
"255.255.20.11" because ".020" is interpreted as "16" expressed in octal, and ".011"
as "9". To avoid confusion, use only decimal expressions of byte values (0 to 255),
with no leading zeros.
For example, the 33210A assumes that all dot-notation addresses are expressed as
decimal byte values and strips all leading zeros from these byte values. Thus,
attempting to set an IP address of "255.255.020.011" will become "255.255.20.11" (a
purely decimal expression). Be sure to enter the exact expression, "255.255.20.11",
in your PC web software to address the instrument. Do not use "255.255.020.011" -
the PC will interpret this address differently due to the leading zeros.
131

Subnet Mask (LAN) Subnetting allows the network administrator to

divide a network into smaller networks to simplify administration and to
minimize network traffic. The subnet mask indicates the portion of the
host address to be used to indicate the subnet.
• You need not set a subnet mask if DHCP or Auto IP is in use.
• Contact your network administrator to find out whether subnetting is

being used, and for the correct subnet mask.
• Enter the subnet mask using the numeric keypad (not the knob).
• The subnet mask is stored in non-volatile memory and does not

3 change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset.
and Auto IP are On. Select DHCP Off and Auto IP Off. Then select
Subnet Mask. Enter the appropriate mask (for example: 255.255.0.0).
• There is no SCPI command to set a subnet mask.
Default Gateway (LAN) A gateway is a network device that provides a

connection between networks. The default gateway setting is the IP
address of such a device.
• You need not set a gateway address if DHCP or Auto IP is in use.
• Contact your network administrator to find out whether a gateway is

being used, and for the address.
• Enter the gateway address using the numeric keypad (not the knob).
• The gateway address is stored in non-volatile memory and does not

and Auto IP are On. Select DHCP Off and Auto IP Off. Then select
Default Gateway and set the appropriate gateway address.
• There is no SCPI command to set a gateway address.
132

Host Name (LAN) A host name is the host portion of the domain name,
which is translated into an IP address.
• Contact your network administrator for the correct host name.
• Enter the host name using the knob and cursor keys. Each character
in the name can be a letter ("a" through "z"), number, or dash ("_").
• Use the knob to select each character.
• Use the cursor key to move to the next character.
• You can use the keypad for numbers.

3
• Use the key to delete all characters to the right, starting at
the cursor position.
• The host name is stored in non-volatile memory and does not change
LAN, then Modify Settings, followed by DNS Setup. The Host Name
field appears. Enter the host name.
• There is no SCPI command to set a host name.
133

Domain Name (LAN) A domain name is a registered name on the

Internet, which is translated into an IP address.
• Contact your network administrator for the correct domain name.
• Enter the domain name using the knob and cursor keys. Each
character can be a letter ("a" through "z"), number, dash ("_"), or
period (“.”).
3 • You can use the keypad for numbers.

• The host name is stored in non-volatile memory and does not change
LAN, then Modify Settings, followed by DNS Setup. Then select
Domain Name and enter the domain name.
• There is no SCPI command to set a domain name.
DNS Server (LAN) DNS (Domain Name Service) is an Internet service

that translates Domain names into IP addresses. The DNS server
address is the IP address of a server that performs this service.
• Contact your network administrator to find out whether DNS is being

used, and for the correct DNS server address.
• Enter the address using the numeric keypad (not the knob).
• The DNS server address is stored in non-volatile memory and does

not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset.
LAN, then Modify Settings, followed by DNS Setup. Then select DNS
Server and enter the server address.
• There is no SCPI command to set a DNS server address.
134

Web Password (LAN) You can set a password to control access to your
instrument via the Web Interface. The default is no password.
• Enter the password using the knob and cursor keys. Each character
must be a letter ("a" through "z").

3
LAN, then Modify Settings. The Password field appears. Enter the
desired password.
• There is no SCPI command to set the password.
Current Configuration (LAN) Select the Currently Active Settings

display to view the MAC address and current LAN configuration.
• Front panel operation: Press and press the I/O softkey.

Select LAN, and then select Current Config. Use the “arrow” softkeys
to scroll the list.
• There is no SCPI command to display the configuration screen.
Note: This display reflects only the settings that are currently active.
If you have changed any LAN settings, you must first cycle the power to
activate the settings, then select Current Config. Also, this display is
static. It does not update information for events that have occurred after
the information is displayed. For example, if DHCP assigns an IP
address while the display is open, you will not see the new IP address
until you press the Refresh button.
Additional SCPI Configuration Commands (LAN) There are some

additional LAN configuration commands, not covered here, that are
covered in Chapter 4. See “Interface Configuration Commands” starting
on page 242 for complete information about using SCPI commands for
LAN interface control.
135

Agilent 33210A Web Interface

The Agilent 33210A provides a web interface resident in the instrument.
You can use this interface over the LAN to view and modify the
instrument’s I/O configuration. Also, a remote front panel interface is
provided, which allows you to control the instrument over the network.
To access and use the web interface:
1. Establish LAN interface connectivity from your PC to the 33210A.
2. Open your PC’s web browser.
3. To launch the web interface enter the IP address of the instrument, or

3 its fully qualified host name, in the browser address field.
4. Follow the directions in the web interface’s online help.
USB Configuration
There are no USB configuration parameters to configure. You can
retrieve the USB ID string (set by the manufacturer) by using the Show
USB Id feature:
Show USB Id. The USB string appears in the form:
USB ID = usb0::2391::1031::MY48nnnnnn::INSTR
where “MY48nnnnnn” is the instrument’s serial number.
• There is no SCPI command to display the USB ID.
136

External Timebase Reference (Option 001)

Option 001 is the External Timebase Reference, which provides rear
panel connectors (10 MHz In and 10 MHz Out) and circuitry to allow
synchronization between multiple Agilent 33210A function generators or
to an external 10 MHz clock signal. You can also set the phase offset of
the output waveform from the front panel or over the remote interface.
To synchronize multiple 33210As, all of them must have Option 001
installed.
To align the phase of two 33210As, you can use a dual-channel
oscilloscope to compare the output signals: 3
1. Connect two 33210As, with 10 MHz Out connected to 10 MHz In:
2. Connect the outputs of the 33210As to the scope channel inputs:
3. Set the same frequency on both function generators. The scope should
show the signals to be in sync with regard frequency, but not phase.
(A square wave works well to show the phase difference.)
137

4. Leaving the phase setting at its default (zero) on the first 33210A, use
the Adjust Phase feature to adjust the phase of the second 33210A to
align the output signals:
3
Out of Phase Aligned
You can use the Set 0 Phase feature to set a new zero-phase reference
point with the two function generators now aligned.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and select the Output Setup,

softkey, then Adjust Phase. Set the phase angle (±360 degrees) using
the knob and cursor keys or the numeric keypad. Once you have
aligned the signals on the scope, press Set 0 Phase to set a new zero-
phase reference point.
• Remote Interface Operation: Use the following command to set the

phase offset (the query returns the currently set offset):
PHASe {<angle>|MINimum|MAXimum}
PHASe? [MINimum|MAXimum]
• The following command sets a new zero-phase reference point:
PHASe:REFerence
Application Note 1426: “How to Connect Two or More Signal
Generators to Create a Multi-Channel Waveform Generator” provides
additional information on this subject.
138

Calibration Overview
This section gives a brief introduction to the calibration features of the
function generator. For a more detailed discussion of the calibration
procedures, see chapter 4 in the Agilent 33210A Service Guide.
Calibration Security
This feature allows you to enter a security code to prevent accidental or
unauthorized calibrations of the function generator. When you first
receive your function generator, it is secured. Before you can perform a 3
calibration, you must unsecure the function generator by entering the
correct security code.
If you forget your security code, you can disable the security feature by
means of two “CAL ENABLE” pads on the main PC board inside the
instrument. See the Agilent 33210A Service Guide for more information.
• The security code is set to “AT33210A” when the function generator is

shipped from the factory. The security code is stored in non-volatile
memory and does not change when power has been off or after a
remote interface reset.
• The security code may contain up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

The first character must be a letter, but the remaining characters can
be letters, numbers, or an underscore (“ _ ”). You do not have to use
all 12 characters but the first character must always be a letter.
139

To Unsecure for Calibration You can unsecure the function

generator either from the front panel or over the remote interface.
The function generator is secured when shipped from the factory and
the security code is set to “AT33210A”.
• Once you enter a security code, that code must be used for both front-
panel and remote operation. For example, if you secure the function
generator from the front panel, you must use that same code to
unsecure it from the remote interface.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the Secure Off

3 • Remote Interface Operation: To unsecure the function generator,
send the following command with the correct security code.
CAL:SECURE:STATE OFF,AT33210A
To Secure Against Calibration You can secure the function generator

either from the front panel or over the remote interface. The function
generator is secured when shipped from the factory and the security code
is set to “AT33210A”.
• Once you enter a security code, that code must be used for both front-
panel and remote operation. For example, if you secure the function
generator from the front panel, you must use that same code to
unsecure it from the remote interface.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the Secure On

• Remote Interface Operation: To secure the function generator,

send the following command with the correct security code.
CAL:SECURE:STATE ON,AT33210A
140

To Change the Security Code To change the security code, you must
first unsecure the function generator, and then enter a new code.
Make sure you have read the security code rules described on page 139
before attempting to change the security code.
• Front-Panel Operation: To change the security code, unsecure the

function generator using the old security code. Then press and
select the Secure Code softkey from the “Test / Cal” menu.
Changing the code from the front panel also changes the security
code as seen from the remote interface.
• Remote Interface Operation: To change the security code, you must

first unsecure the function generator using the old security code.
Then enter the new code as shown below.
3
CAL:SECURE:STATE OFF, AT33210A Unsecure with old code
CAL:SECURE:CODE SN123456789 Enter new code
Calibration Count
You can query the function generator to determine how many calibrations
have been performed. Note that your function generator was calibrated
before it left the factory. When you receive your function generator,
be sure to read the count to determine its initial value.
• The calibration count is stored in non-volatile memory and does not

• The calibration count increments up to a maximum of 65,535 after

which it rolls over to “0”. Since the value increments by one for each
calibration point, a complete calibration may increase the value by
many counts.
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the Cal Info

softkey from the “Test / Cal” menu. The calibration count is listed as
one of the messages on the display.
CAL:COUNt?
141

Calibration Message
The function generator allows you to store one message in calibration
memory in the mainframe. For example, you can store such information
as the date when the last calibration was performed, the date when the
next calibration is due, the function generator's serial number, or the
name and phone number of the person to contact for a new calibration.
• You can record a calibration message only from the remote interface
and only when the function generator is unsecured. You can read the
message from either the front-panel or over the remote interface.
You can read the calibration message whether the function generator
3 is secured or unsecured.
• The calibration message may contain up to 40 characters (additional

characters are truncated).
• Storing a calibration message will overwrite any message previously

stored in memory.
• The calibration message is stored in non-volatile memory and does not

• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the Cal Info

softkey from the “Test / Cal” menu. The calibration message is listed
as one of the messages on the display.
• Remote Interface Operation: To store the calibration message, send the

following command, including any desired string within the single
quotes (‘ ’).
CAL:STR 'Cal Due: 01 August 2008'
142

Factory Default Settings

The table on the following page summarizes the factory default settings
for the Agilent 33210A.
Note: The power-on state will be different than that in the table if you
have enabled the power-down recall mode. See “Instrument State
Storage” on page 119.
143

Agilent 33210A Factory Default Settings

Output Configuration Factory Setting
Function Sine wave
Frequency 1 kHz
Amplitude / Offset 100 mVpp / 0.000 Vdc
Output Units Vpp
Output Termination 50Ω
Autorange On
Modulation Factory Setting
Carrier (AM, FM) 1 kHz Sine wave
Carrier (PWM) 1 kHz Pulse
Mod. Waveform (AM) 100 Hz Sine wave
Mod. Waveform (FM, PWM) 10 Hz Sine wave
AM Depth 100%
3 FM Deviation 100 Hz
PWM Width Deviation 10 µs
Modulation State Off
Sweep Factory Setting
Start / Stop Frequency 100 Hz / 1 kHz
Sweep Time 1 Second
Sweep Mode Linear
Sweep State Off
Burst Factory Setting
Burst Count 1 Cycle
Burst Period 10 ms
Burst Start Phase 0 degrees
Burst State Off
System-Related Operations Factory Setting
• Power-Down Recall • Disabled
Display Mode On
Error Queue Errors are Cleared
Stored States, Stored Arbs No Change
Output State Off
Triggering Operations Factory Setting
Trigger Source Internal (Immediate)
Remote Interface Configuration Factory Setting
• GPIB Address • 10
• DHCP • On
• Auto IP • On
• IP Address • 169.254.2.20
• Subnet Mask • 255.255.0.0
• Default Gateway • 0.0.0.0
• DNS Server • 0.0.0.0
• Host Name • none
• Domain Name • none
Calibration Factory Setting
• Calibration State • Secured
Parameters marked with a bullet ( • ) are stored in non-volatile memory.
144
Remote Interface Reference

Remote Interface Reference

• SCPI Command Summary, on page 147
SCPI • Simplified Programming Overview, on page 160
• Using the APPLy Command, on page 162
• Output Configuration Commands, on page 171
• Pulse Configuration Commands, on page 184
• Amplitude Modulation (AM) Commands, on page 189
• Frequency Modulation (FM) Commands, on page 193
• Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Commands, on page 203
• Frequency Sweep Commands, on page 203
• Burst Mode Commands, on page 211
• Triggering Commands, on page 219
• Arbitrary Waveform Commands (Option 002), on page 222
• State Storage Commands, on page 233
• System-Related Commands, on page 237
4 • Interface Configuration Commands, on page 242
• Phase-Lock Commands (Option 001 Only), on page 247
• The SCPI Status System, on page 249
• Status Reporting Commands, on page 259
• Calibration Commands, on page 263
SCPI • An Introduction to the SCPI Language, on page 265
• Using Device Clear, on page 270
Throughout this manual “default” states and values are identified. These
are the power-on default states provided you have not enabled the
power-down recall mode (see “Instrument State Storage” in chapter 3).
SCPI If you are a first-time user of the SCPI language, please refer to these sections to become
familiar with the language before attempting to program the function generator.
146
Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference

SCPI Command Summary
Command Summary
Throughout this manual, the following conventions are used for
SCPI command syntax for remote interface programming:
• Square brackets ( [ ] ) indicate optional keywords or parameters.
• Braces ( { } ) enclose parameters within a command string.
• Triangle brackets ( < > ) enclose parameters for which you must
substitute a value.
• A vertical bar ( | ) separates multiple parameter choices.
The APPLy Commands
(see page 162 for more information) 4

APPLy
:SINusoid [<frequency> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]
:SQUare [<frequency> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]
:RAMP [<frequency> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]
:PULSe [<frequency> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]
:NOISe [<frequency|DEF>1 [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]
:DC [<frequency|DEF>1 [,<amplitude>|DEF>1 [,<offset>] ]]
:USER [<frequency> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]
APPLy?
1
This parameter has no effect for this command but you MUST specify
a value or “DEFault”.
147

Command Summary
Output Configuration Commands
(see page 171 for more information)
FUNCtion?
FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
VOLTage? [MINimum|MAXimum]
VOLTage:OFFSet? [MINimum|MAXimum]
VOLTage
:HIGH {<voltage>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:HIGH? [MINimum|MAXimum]
:LOW {<voltage>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:LOW? [MINimum|MAXimum]
4 VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO {OFF|ON|ONCE}
VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO?
VOLTage:UNIT?
FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]
FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry? [MINimum|MAXimum]
OUTPut {OFF|ON}
OUTPut?
OUTPut:LOAD? [MINimum|MAXimum]
OUTPut:POLarity?
OUTPut:SYNC {OFF|ON}
OUTPut:SYNC?
Parameters shown in bold are selected following a *RST (reset) command.
148

Command Summary
Pulse Configuration Commands
PULSe:PERiod? [MINimum|MAXimum]
FUNCtion:PULSe
:HOLD {WIDTh|DCYCle}
:HOLD? [WIDTh|DCYCle]
:WIDTh {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum} 50% to 50% Thresholds
:WIDTh? [MINimum|MAXimum]
:DCYCle {<percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]
:TRANsition {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum} 10% to 90% Thresholds
:TRANsition? [MINimum|MAXimum]
149

Command Summary
Modulation Commands
AM Commands AM:INTernal
:FUNCtion {SINusoid|SQUare|RAMP|NRAMp|TRIangle|NOISe|USER}
:FUNCtion?
AM:INTernal
:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
AM:DEPTh? [MINimum|MAXimum]
AM:SOURce?
AM:STATe {OFF|ON}
AM:STATe?
4 FM Commands FM:INTernal
:FUNCtion?
FM:INTernal
FM:DEViation? [MINimum|MAXimum]
FM:SOURce?
FM:STATe {OFF|ON}
FM:STATe?
150

PWM Commands PWM:INTernal

Command Summary
:FUNCtion?
PWM:INTernal
PWM:DEViation {<deviation in seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
PWM:DEViation? [MINimum|MAXimum]
PWM:DEViation:DCYCle {<deviation in percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
PWM:DEViation:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]
PWM:SOURce?
PWM:STATe {OFF|ON}
PWM:STATe?
151

Command Summary
Sweep Commands
FREQuency
:STARt {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:STARt? [MINimum|MAXimum]
:STOP {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:STOP? [MINimum|MAXimum]
FREQuency
:CENTer {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:CENTer? [MINimum|MAXimum]
:SPAN {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:SPAN? [MINimum|MAXimum]
SWEep
:SPACing {LINear|LOGarithmic}
:SPACing?
:TIME {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
4 :TIME? [MINimum|MAXimum]
SWEep:STATe?
TRIGger:SOURce?
TRIGger:SLOPe {POSitive|NEGative} “Trig In” Connector
TRIGger:SLOPe?
OUTPut
:TRIGger:SLOPe {POSitive|NEGative} “Trig Out” Connector
:TRIGger:SLOPe?
:TRIGger {OFF|ON}
:TRIGger?
MARKER:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
MARKer {OFF|ON}
MARKer?
152

Command Summary
Burst Commands
BURSt:MODE?
BURSt:NCYCles? [MINimum|MAXimum]
BURSt:INTernal:PERiod? [MINimum|MAXimum]
BURSt:PHASe? [MINimum|MAXimum]
BURSt:STATe?
UNIT:ANGLe {DEGree|RADian}
UNIT:ANGLe?
TRIGger:SOURce {IMMediate|EXTernal|BUS} Triggered Burst 4
TRIGger:SOURce?
TRIGger:SLOPe?
BURSt:GATE:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted} External Gated Burst
BURSt:GATE:POLarity?
OUTPut
:TRIGger:SLOPe?
:TRIGger {OFF|ON}
:TRIGger?
153

Command Summary
Arbitrary Waveform Commands

DATA VOLATILE, <value>, <value>, . . .

DATA:DAC VOLATILE, {<binary block>|<value>, <value>, . . . }
FORMat:BORDer {NORMal|SWAPped} Specify Byte Order
FORMat:BORDer?
DATA:COPY <destination arb name> [,VOLATILE]
FUNCtion:USER {<arb name>1|VOLATILE}
FUNCtion:USER?
4 FUNCtion USER
FUNCtion?
DATA
:CATalog?
:NVOLatile:CATalog?
:NVOLatile:FREE?
DATA:DELete <arb name>
DATA:DELete:ALL
DATA
:ATTRibute:AVERage? [<arb name>1]
:ATTRibute:CFACtor? [<arb name>1]
:ATTRibute:POINts? [<arb name>1]
:ATTRibute:PTPeak? [<arb name>1]
1
The names of the built-in arb waveforms are: EXP_RISE, EXP_FALL,
NEG_RAMP, SINC, and CARDIAC.
154

Command Summary
Triggering Commands
These commands are used for Sweep and Burst only.
TRIGger:SOURce?
TRIGger
*TRG
TRIGger:SLOPe?
BURST:GATE:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted} External Gated Burst
BURST:GATE:POLarity?
OUTPut
:TRIGger:SLOPe? 4
:TRIGger {OFF|ON}
:TRIGger?
State Storage Commands

*RCL {0|1|2|3|4} States 1 through 4 are user-defined states.
MEMory:STATe
:NAME {0|1|2|3|4} [,<name>]
:NAME? {0|1|2|3|4}
:DELete {0|1|2|3|4}
:RECall:AUTO {OFF|ON}
:RECall:AUTO?
:VALid? {0|1|2|3|4}
:CATalog?
MEMory:NSTates?
155

Command Summary
System-Related Commands
SYSTem:ERRor?
*IDN?
DISPlay {OFF|ON}
DISPlay?
DISPlay
:TEXT <quoted string>
:TEXT?
:TEXT:CLEar
*RST
*TST?
SYSTem:VERSion?
4 SYSTem
:BEEPer
:BEEPer:STATe {OFF|ON}
:BEEPer:STATe?
SYSTem
:KLOCk[:STATe] {OFF|ON}
:KLOCk:EXCLude {NONE|LOCal}
:KLOCk:EXCLude?
SYSTem:SECurity:IMMediate Caution. Clears all memory. Not
recommended for routine applications.
*LRN?
*OPC
*OPC?
*OPT?
*WAI
156

Command Summary
Interface Configuration Commands
SYSTem:LOCal
SYSTem:REMote
SYSTem:RWLock
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RLSTate {LOCal|REMote|RWLock}
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB
:ADDRess <address>
:ADDRess?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN
:AUTOip[:STATe] {OFF|0|ON|1}
:AUTOip[:STATe]?
:IPADdress <address>
:IPADdress?
:LIPaddress?
:MAC?
4
:MEDiasense {OFF|0|ON|1}
:MEDiasense?
:NETBios {OFF|0|ON|1}
:NETBios?
:TELNet:PROMpt <string>
:TELNet:PROMpt?
:TELNet:WMESsage <string>
:TELNet:WMESsage?
157

Phase-Lock Commands
These commands require Option 001, External Timebase Reference (see

page 247 for more information).
PHASe:REFerence
PHASe:UNLock:ERRor:STATe {OFF|ON}
PHASe:UNLock:ERRor:STATe?
UNIT:ANGLe?
Status Reporting Commands
4 (see page 259 for more information)
*STB?
*SRE <enable value>
*SRE?
STATus
:QUEStionable:CONDition?
:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
:QUEStionable:ENABle <enable value>
:QUEStionable:ENABle?
*ESR?
*ESE <enable value>
*ESE?
*CLS
STATus:PRESet
*PSC {0|1}
*PSC?
*OPC
158

Calibration Commands
CAL?
CAL
:SECure:STATe {OFF|ON},<code>
:SECure:STATe?
:SECure:CODE <new code>
:SETup <0|1|2|3| . . . |94>
:SETup?
:VALue <value>
:VALue?
:COUNt?
:STRing <quoted string>
:STRing?
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands 4

*CLS
*ESR?
*ESE <enable value>
*ESE?
*IDN?
*LRN?
*OPC
*OPC?
*OPT?
*PSC {0|1}
*PSC?
*RST
*RCL {0|1|2|3|4} States 1 through 4 are user-defined states.
*STB?
*SRE <enable value>
*SRE?
*TRG
*TST?
159

Simplified Programming Overview

This section gives an overview of the basic techniques used to program
the function generator over the remote interface. This section is only an
overview and does not give all of the details you will need to write your
own application programs. Refer to the remainder of this chapter and
also the application examples in chapter 6 for more details. You may also
want to refer to the reference manual that came with your programming
application for further details on instrument control.
Using the APPLy Command

The APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to
program the function generator over the remote interface. For example,
the following command string sent from your computer will output a
3 Vpp sine wave at 5 kHz with a -2.5 volt offset.
APPL:SIN 5.0E+3, 3.0, -2.5
4
Using the Low-Level Commands
Although the APPLy command provides the most straightforward method
to program the function generator, the low-level commands give you
more flexibility to change individual parameters. For example,
the following command strings sent from your computer will output a
3 Vpp sine wave at 5 kHz with a -2.5 volt offset.
FUNC SIN Select sine wave function
FREQ 5000 Set frequency to 5 kHz
VOLT 3.0 Set amplitude to 3 Vpp
VOLT:OFFS -2.5 Set offset to -2.5 Vdc
160

Reading a Query Response

Only the query commands (commands that end with “?”) will instruct
the function generator to send a response message. Queries return
internal instrument settings. For example, the following command string
sent from your computer will read the function generator’s error queue
and retrieve the response from the most recent error.
dimension statement Dimension string array (255 elements)
SYST:ERR? Read error queue
enter statement Enter error string response
Selecting a Trigger Source

When Sweep or Burst is enabled, the function generator will accept an
immediate internal trigger, a hardware trigger from the rear-panel
Trig In connector, a manual trigger from the front-panel key, or a
software (bus) trigger. By default, the internal trigger source is selected.
If you want to use an external or a software trigger source, you must first
select that source. For example, the following command strings sent from 4
your computer will output a 3-cycle burst each time the rear-panel
Trig In connector receives the rising edge of a TTL pulse.
BURS:NCYC 3 Set burst count to 3 cycles
TRIG:SLOP POS Set polarity to rising edge
TRIG:SOUR EXT Select external trigger source
BURS:STAT ON Enable burst mode
161


See also “Output Configuration” starting on page 53 in chapter 3.
The APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to
program the function generator over the remote interface. You can select
the function, frequency, amplitude, and offset all in one command as
shown in the syntax statement below.
APPLy:<function> [<frequency> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]
For example, the following command string sent from your computer will
output a 3 Vpp sine wave at 5 kHz with a -2.5 volt offset.
APPL:SIN 5 KHZ, 3.0 VPP, -2.5 V
The APPLy command performs the following operations:
• Sets the trigger source to Immediate (equivalent to sending the

4 TRIG:SOUR IMM command).
• Turns off any modulation, sweep, or burst mode currently enabled

and places the instrument in the continuous waveform mode.
• Turns on the Output connector (OUTP ON command) but does not

change the output termination setting (OUTP:LOAD command).
• Overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables

autoranging (VOLT:RANG:AUTO command).
• For square waveforms, overrides the current duty cycle setting and
automatically selects 50% (FUNC:SQU:DCYC command).
• For ramp waveforms, overrides the current symmetry setting and

automatically selects 100% (FUNC:RAMP:SYMM command).
The syntax statements for the APPLy command are shown on page 167.
162

Output Frequency
• For the frequency parameter of the APPLy command, the output
frequency range depends on the function specified. You can substitute
“MINimum”, “MAXimum”, or “DEFault” in place of a specific value
for the frequency parameter. MIN selects the lowest frequency
allowed for the function specified and MAX selects the highest
frequency allowed. The default frequency is 1 kHz for all functions.
Sine 1 mHz 10 MHz

Square 1 mHz 10 MHz
Ramp 1 mHz 100 kHz
Pulse 1 mHz 5 MHz
Arbs 1 mHz 3 MHz
• Limits Due to Function: The frequency limits are determined by the

function specified in the APPLy command. The APPLy command
always sets both the function and the frequency, and the specified
4
frequency must be appropriate for the function. For example, the
command APPL:RAMP 10 MHz results in a “Data out of range” error.
The frequency is set to 100 kHz, which is the maximum for a ramp
waveform.
163

Output Amplitude
• For the amplitude parameter of the APPLy command, the output
amplitude range depends on the function specified and the output
termination. You can substitute “MINimum”, “MAXimum”, or “DEFault”
in place of a specific value for the amplitude parameter. MIN selects
the smallest amplitude (10 mVpp into 50 ohms). MAX selects the
largest amplitude for the function specified (at most 10 Vpp into
50 ohms depending on function and offset voltage). The default
amplitude is 100 mVpp (into 50 ohms) for all functions.
• Limits Due to Output Termination: The output amplitude limits are

determined by the current output termination setting (the APPLy
command does not change the termination setting). For example,
if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the output
termination from 50 ohms to “high impedance”, the amplitude
displayed on the function generator’s front-panel will double to
20 Vpp (and no error will be generated). If you change from “high
impedance” to 50 ohms, the displayed amplitude will drop in half.
4 See the OUTP:LOAD command on page 181 for more information.
• You can set the output amplitude in Vpp, Vrms, or dBm by specifying
the units as part of the APPLy command as shown below.
APPL:SIN 5.0E+3, 3.0 VRMS, -2.5
Or, you can use the VOLT:UNIT command (see page 183) to specify
the output units for all commands that follow. Unless you specify
the units as part of the APPLy command, the VOLT:UNIT command
takes precedence. For example, if you select “Vrms” using the
VOLT:UNIT command and do not include units with the APPLy
command, the value specified for the amplitude parameter in the
APPLy command will be in “Vrms”.
164


automatically converted to Vpp. See the VOLT:UNIT command on

to 3.536 Vrms (the upper limit for sine waves in Vrms). From the
remote interface, a “Data out of range” error will be generated and the
amplitude will be adjusted as described.

of values between ±1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is limited 4

output attenuators. The amplitude is controlled, however, so the
output voltage will never exceed the current setting while switching
ranges. To prevent this disruption in the output, you can disable the
voltage autoranging feature using the VOLT:RANG:AUTO command
(see page 178 for more information). The APPLy command
automatically enables autoranging.
165

DC Offset Voltage
• For the offset parameter of the APPLy command, you can substitute
“MINimum”, “MAXimum”, or “DEFault” in place of a specific value
for the parameter. MIN selects the most negative dc offset voltage for
the function and amplitude specified. MAX selects the largest dc offset
for the function and amplitude specified. The default offset is 0 volts
for all functions.
• Limits Due to Amplitude: The relationship between offset voltage and

output amplitude is shown below. Vmax is the maximum peak voltage
for the selected output termination (5 volts for a 50Ω load or 10 volts
for a high-impedance load).
|Voffset| < Vmax – Vpp

-----------
2
If the specified offset voltage is not valid, the function generator will
amplitude specified. From the remote interface, a “Data out of range”
4 error will be generated and the offset will be adjusted as described.
• Limits Due to Output Termination: The offset limits are determined

by the current output termination setting (the APPLy command does
not change the termination setting). For example, if you set the offset
to 100 mVdc and then change the output termination from 50 ohms
to “high impedance”, the offset voltage displayed on the function
generator’s front-panel will double to 200 mVdc (and no error will
be generated). If you change from “high impedance” to 50 ohms,
the displayed offset will drop in half. See the OUTP:LOAD command on

is limited to 4.95 volts (into 50 ohms). The “0” DAC value is still used
as the offset reference even if the waveform data points do not span
the full range of the output DAC.
166

APPLy Command Syntax

• Because of the use of optional parameters in the APPLy commands
(enclosed in square brackets), you must specify frequency to use the
amplitude parameter, and you must specify both frequency and
amplitude to use the offset parameter. For example, the following
command string is valid (frequency and amplitude are specified but
offset is omitted and therefore uses a default value).
APPL:SIN 5.0E+3, 3.0
However, you cannot specify an amplitude or offset without specifying

a frequency.
• You can substitute “MINimum”, “MAXimum”, or “DEFault” in place

of specific values for the frequency, amplitude, and offset parameters.
For example, the following statement outputs a 3 Vpp sine wave at
10 MHz (the maximum frequency for sine) with a -2.5 volt offset.
APPL:SIN MAX, 3.0, -2.5 4

• The APPLy command performs the following operations:
• Sets the trigger source to Immediate (equivalent to sending the

TRIG:SOUR IMM command).
• Turns off any modulation, sweep, or burst mode currently enabled

and places the instrument in the continuous waveform mode.
• Turns on the Output connector (OUTP ON command) but does not

change the output termination setting (OUTP:LOAD command).
• Overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables

autoranging (VOLT:RANG:AUTO command).
• For square waveforms, overrides the current duty cycle setting

and automatically selects 50% (FUNC:SQU:DCYC command).
• For ramp waveforms, overrides the current symmetry setting and

automatically selects 100% (FUNC:RAMP:SYMM command).
167

APPLy:SINusoid [<frequency> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]

Output a sine wave with the specified frequency, amplitude, and
dc offset. The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed.
APPLy:SQUare [<frequency> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]

Output a square wave with the specified frequency, amplitude, and
dc offset. This command overrides the current duty cycle setting and
automatically selects 50%. The waveform is output as soon as the
command is executed.
APPLy:RAMP [<frequency> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]

Output a ramp wave with the specified frequency, amplitude, and
dc offset. This command overrides the current symmetry setting and
automatically selects 100%. The waveform is output as soon as the
APPLy:PULSe [<frequency> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]

4 Output a pulse wave with the specified frequency, amplitude, and
dc offset. The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed.
• This command preserves the current pulse width setting

(FUNC:PULS:WIDT command) or pulse duty cycle setting
(FUNC:PULS:DCYC command), depending on which has been selected
to “hold” (FUNC:PULS:HOLD command). The edge time setting
(FUNC:PULS:TRAN command) is also preserved. However, based on
the specified frequency, the function generator will adjust the pulse
width or edge time to comply with the frequency restrictions for pulse
waveforms. See page 184 for more information on setting the pulse
width and edge time.
168

APPLy:NOISe [<frequency|DEFault> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]

Output Gaussian noise with the specified amplitude and dc offset.
The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed.
• The frequency parameter has no effect for this command but you must
specify a value or “DEFault” (the noise function has a 7 MHz
bandwidth). If you specify a frequency, it has no effect on the noise
output, but the value is remembered when you change to a different
function. The following statement shows the use of the APPLy
command for noise.
APPL:NOIS DEF, 5.0, 2.0
APPLy:DC [<frequency|DEFault> [,<amplitude>|DEFault> [,<offset>] ]]

Output a dc voltage with the level specified by the offset parameter.
You can set the dc voltage to any value between ±5 Vdc into 50 ohms or
±10 Vdc into an open circuit. The dc voltage is output as soon as the
4
• The frequency and amplitude parameters have no effect for this
command but you must specify a value or “DEFault”. If you specify
a frequency and amplitude, they have no effect on the dc output,
but the values are remembered when you change to a different
function. The following statement shows the use of the APPLy command
for a dc output.
APPL:DC DEF, DEF, -2.5
APPLy:USER [<frequency> [,<amplitude> [,<offset>] ]]

Output the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the FUNC:USER

command. The waveform is output using the specified frequency,
amplitude, and dc offset. The waveform is output as soon as the
command is executed. See page 222 for more information on downloading
arbitrary waveforms to memory.
169

APPLy?
Query the function generator’s current configuration and return a
quoted string. The purpose of this command is to allow you to append
this query response to an APPL: command in your programming
application and use the result to place the function generator in the
specified state. The function, frequency, amplitude, and offset are
returned as shown in the sample string below (the quotation marks are
returned as part of the string).
"SIN +5.0000000000000E+03,+3.0000000000000E+00,-2.5000000000000E+00"
170


See also “Output Configuration” starting on page 53 in chapter 3.
This section describes the low-level commands used to program the
function generator. Although the APPLy command provides the most
straightforward method to program the function generator, the low-level
commands give you more flexibility to change individual parameters.
FUNCtion?
Select the output function. The selected waveform is output using the
previously selected frequency, amplitude, and offset voltage settings. The
FUNC? query returns “SIN”, “SQU”, “RAMP”, “PULS”, “NOIS”, “DC”, or
“USER.”
• If you select “USER”, the function generator outputs the arbitrary

waveform currently selected by the FUNC:USER command. 4
The table below shows which output functions are allowed with
modulation, sweep, and burst. Each “ • ” indicates a valid combination.
If you change to a function that is not allowed with modulation,
sweep, or burst, the modulation or mode is turned off.
Sine Square Ramp Pulse Noise DC Arb/

User1
AM, FM Carrier • •
PWM Carrier •
Sweep Mode • • •
Burst Mode • • •
1 Note: Arbitrary waveforms are also referred to as user-defined

waveforms.
171


the output frequency to 100 kHz (the upper limit for ramps). From the
remote interface, a “Settings conflict” error will be generated and the
frequency will be adjusted as described.
• Amplitude Limitations: If you change to a function whose maximum

amplitude is less than that of the current function, the amplitude is
automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new function.
This may occur when the output units are Vrms or dBm due to the
differences in crest factor for the various output functions.
automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3.536 Vrms (the upper
4 limit for sine in Vrms). From the remote interface, a “Settings conflict”
error will be generated and the amplitude will be adjusted as described.
172

FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the output frequency. MIN selects the lowest frequency allowed for
the selected function and MAX selects the highest frequency allowed.
The default is 1 kHz for all functions. The FREQ? query returns the
frequency setting in hertz for the function currently selected.
Sine 1 mHz 10 MHz

Square 1 mHz 10 MHz
Ramp 1 mHz 100 kHz
Pulse 1 mHz 5 MHz
Arbs 1 mHz 3 MHz
• Function Limitations: The frequency limits are function dependent,

as shown in the above table. If you send a command specifying a
frequency that is not in the appropriate range for the current
function, an error will occur. For example, if the current function is 4
“ramp” and you send the command FREQ 10 MHz, a “Data out of
range” error is generated and the frequency is set to 100 kHz, which
is the maximum for a ramp waveform.
• Duty Cycle Limitations: For square waveforms, the function generator

may not be able to use the full range of duty cycle values at higher
frequencies as shown below.
20% to 80% (to 5 MHz)

40% to 60% (to 10 MHz)
If you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle,
limit for this frequency). From the remote interface, a “Settings conflict”
error will be generated and the duty cycle will be adjusted as described.
173

VOLTage? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the output amplitude. The default amplitude is 100 mVpp (into 50Ω)
for all functions. MIN selects the smallest amplitude (10 mVpp into
50Ω). MAX selects the largest amplitude for the selected function (at
most 10 Vpp into 50Ω depending on the selected function and offset
voltage). The VOLT? query returns the output amplitude for the function
currently selected. Values are always returned in the units set by the
most recent VOLT:UNIT command.
• Offset Voltage Limitations: The output amplitude and offset are

related to Vmax as shown below.
|Voffset| + Vpp ÷ 2 < Vmax
where Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output
termination (5 volts for a 50Ω load or 10 volts for a high-impedance
load). The new amplitude specified in the VOLT command will be set,
4 but the offset voltage may be reduced accordingly, and a “Settings
conflict” error generated.

termination setting, the displayed output amplitude will be
automatically adjusted (and no error will be generated). For example,
if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the output
termination from 50 ohms to “high impedance”, the amplitude
displayed on the function generator’s front-panel will double to 20 Vpp.
If you change from “high impedance” to 50 ohms, the displayed
amplitude will drop in half. For more information, see the OUTP:LOAD
command on page 181.
• You can set the output amplitude in Vpp, Vrms, or dBm by specifying
the units as part of the VOLT command as shown below.
VOLT 3.0 VRMS
Or, you can use the VOLT:UNIT command (see page 183) to specify
the output units for all commands that follow.

174


to 3.536 Vrms (the upper limit for sine waves in Vrms). From the
amplitude will be adjusted as described.

of values between ±1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is limited

output attenuators. The amplitude is controlled, however, so the 4
output voltage will never exceed the current setting while switching
ranges. To prevent this disruption in the output, you can disable the
voltage autoranging feature using the VOLT:RANG:AUTO command
(see page 178 for more information).
• You can also set the amplitude (with an associated offset voltage)
by specifying a high level and low level. For example, if you set the
high level to +2 volts and the low level to -3 volts, the resulting
amplitude is 5 Vpp (with an associated offset voltage of -500 mV).
See the VOLT:HIGH and VOLT:LOW commands on page 177 for more
information.
• To output a dc voltage level, select the dc voltage function using the

FUNC DC command and then set the offset voltage level using the
VOLT:OFFS command. You can set the dc level to any value between
±5 Vdc into 50 ohms or ±10 Vdc into an open circuit.
175

VOLTage:OFFSet? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the dc offset voltage. The default offset is 0 volts for all functions.
MIN selects the most negative dc offset voltage for the selected function
and amplitude. MAX selects the largest dc offset for the selected function
and amplitude. The :OFFS? query returns the offset voltage for the
function currently selected.
• Limits Due to Amplitude: The output amplitude and offset are related
to Vmax as shown below.
|Voffset| + Vpp ÷ 2 < Vmax
where Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output
termination (5 volts for a 50Ω load or 10 volts for a high-impedance
load). The new offset specified in the VOLT:OFFS command will be set,
but the amplitude may be reduced accordingly, and a “Settings conflict”
error generated.
4 • Limits Due to Output Termination: The offset limits are determined
by the current output termination setting. For example, if you set the
offset to 100 mVdc and then change the output termination from
50 ohms to “high impedance”, the offset voltage displayed on the
function generator’s front-panel will double to 200 mVdc (and no error
will be generated). If you change from “high impedance” to 50 ohms,
the displayed offset will drop in half. See the OUTP:LOAD command on

is limited to 4.95 volts (into 50 ohms).
176

• You can also set the offset by specifying a high level and low level.
For example, if you set the high level to +2 volts and the low level to
-3 volts, the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp (with an associated offset
voltage of -500 mV). See the VOLT:HIGH and VOLT:LOW commands
below for more information.
• To output a dc voltage level, select the dc voltage function using the

FUNC DC command and then set the offset voltage level using the
VOLT:OFFS command. You can set the dc level to any value between
±5 Vdc into 50 ohms or ±10 Vdc into an open circuit.
VOLTage
:HIGH {<voltage>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:HIGH? [MINimum|MAXimum]
:LOW {<voltage>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:LOW? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the high or low voltage levels. For all functions, the default high level
is +50 mV and the default low level is -50 mV. MIN selects the most
negative voltage level for the selected function and MAX selects the 4
largest voltage level. The :HIGH? and :LOW? queries return the high and
low levels, respectively.
• Limits Due to Amplitude: You can set the voltage levels to a positive
or negative value with the restrictions shown below. Vpp is the
maximum peak-to-peak amplitude for the selected output termination
(10 Vpp for a 50-ohm load or 20 Vpp for a high-impedance load).
Vpp ( max )
Vhigh – Vlow < Vpp (max) and Vhigh, Vlow < -------------------------------
2
If the specified level is not valid, the function generator will
automatically adjust it to the maximum voltage allowed. From the
remote interface, a “Data out of range” error will be generated and
the level will be adjusted as described.
• You can set the levels to a positive or negative value, but note that
the high level must always be greater than the low level. If you
specify a low level that is greater than the high level, the function
generator will automatically set the high level to be 1 mV more than
the new low level. A “Settings conflict” error will be generated.
177

• Note that when you set the high and low levels, you are also setting
the amplitude of the waveform. For example, if you set the high level
to +2 volts and the low level to -3 volts, the resulting amplitude is
5 Vpp (with an offset voltage of -500 mV).

termination setting, the displayed voltage levels will be automatically
adjusted (and no error will be generated). For example, if you set the
high level to +100 mVdc and then change the output termination
from 50 ohms to “high impedance”, the voltage displayed on the
function generator’s front-panel will double to +200 mVdc. If you
change from “high impedance” to 50 ohms, the displayed voltage
will drop in half. See the OUTP:LOAD command on page 181 for
more information.
• To invert the waveform relative to the offset voltage, you can use the
OUTP:POL command. See page 182 for more information.
VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO {OFF|ON|ONCE}
4 VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO?
Disable or enable voltage autoranging for all functions. In the default
mode, autoranging is enabled (“ON”) and the function generator
automatically selects the optimal settings for the output amplifier and
attenuators. With autoranging disabled (“OFF”), the function generator
uses the current amplifier and attenuator settings. The :AUTO? query
returns “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
• The APPLy command overrides the voltage autorange setting and

automatically enables autoranging (“ON”).
• The advantage of disabling autoranging is to eliminate momentary

disruptions caused by switching of the attenuators while changing
amplitude. However, the amplitude and offset accuracy and
resolution (as well as waveform fidelity) may be adversely affected
when reducing the amplitude below the expected range change.
• The “ONCE” parameter has the same effect as turning autoranging

“ON”, and then “OFF”. This parameter allows you to make a one-time
change to the amplifier/attenuator setting before returning to the
VOLT:RANG:AUTO OFF setting.
178

FUNCtion:SQUare:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the duty cycle percentage for square waves. Duty cycle represents
the amount of time per cycle that the square wave is at a high level
(assuming that the waveform polarity is not inverted). The default is 50%.
MIN selects the minimum duty cycle for the selected frequency
and MAX selects the maximum duty cycle (see restrictions below).
The :DCYC? query returns the current duty cycle setting in percent.
20% Duty Cycle 80% Duty Cycle
• Duty Cycle: 20% to 80% (to 5 MHz)

40% to 60% (to 10 MHz)
• For square waveforms, the APPLy command overrides the current

4
duty cycle setting and automatically selects 50%.
• The duty cycle setting is remembered when you change from square
wave to another function. When you return to the square wave
function, the previous duty cycle is used.
• Limits Due to Frequency: If the square wave function is selected and

you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle,
limit for this frequency). From the remote interface, a “Settings conflict”
error will be generated and the duty cycle will be adjusted as described.
• If you select a square waveform as the modulating waveform for AM,

FM, or PWM, the duty cycle setting does not apply. The function
generator always uses a square waveform with a 50% duty cycle.
179

FUNCtion:RAMP:SYMMetry? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the symmetry percentage for ramp waves. Symmetry represents the
amount of time per cycle that the ramp wave is rising (assuming that
the waveform polarity is not inverted). You can set the symmetry to any
value from 0% to 100%. The default is 100%. MIN = 0%. MAX = 100%.
The :SYMM? query returns the current symmetry setting in percent.
0% Symmetry 100% Symmetry
• For ramp waveforms, the APPLy command overrides the current

symmetry setting and automatically selects 100%.
• The symmetry setting is remembered when you change from ramp

4 wave to another function. When you return to the ramp wave
function, the previous symmetry is used.
• If you select a ramp waveform as the modulating waveform for AM or

FM, the symmetry setting does not apply.
OUTPut {OFF|ON}
OUTPut?
Disable or enable the front-panel Output connector. The default is “OFF”.
When the output is enabled, the key is illuminated on the function
generator’s front panel. The OUTP? query returns “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
• The APPLy command overrides the current OUTP command setting

and automatically enables the Output connector (“ON”).
• If an excessive external voltage is applied to the front-panel Output

connector, an error message will be displayed and the output will
be disabled. To re-enable the output, remove the overload from the
Output connector and send the OUTP ON command.
180

The OUTPut {OFF|ON} command changes the state of the output

connector by switching the output relay. However, this command does
not zero the voltage to be output before switching the relay. Thus, the
output signal may have “glitches” for about a millisecond until the signal
stabilizes. You can minimize these glitches by first setting the amplitude
to the minimum (using the VOLTage command) and the offset to zero
(using the VOLTage:OFFSet command) before changing the output
state.
OUTPut:LOAD? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Select the desired output termination (i.e., the impedance of the load
attached to the output of the Agilent 33210A). The specified value is used
for amplitude, offset, and high/low level settings. You can set the load to
any value from 1Ω to 10 kΩ. MIN selects 1Ω. MAX selects 10 kΩ. INF sets
the output termination to “high impedance” (>10 kΩ). The default is 50Ω.
The :LOAD? query returns the current load setting in ohms or “9.9E+37”
(for “high impedance”).
4
• The Agilent 33210A has a fixed series output impedance of 50 ohms
to the front-panel Output connector. If the actual load impedance is
different than the value specified, the displayed amplitude, offset,
and high/low levels will be incorrect.
• If you change the output termination setting, the displayed output

amplitude, offset, and high/low levels are automatically adjusted
(and no error will be generated). For example, if you set the amplitude
to 10 Vpp and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to
“high impedance”, the amplitude displayed on the function generator’s
front-panel will double to 20 Vpp. If you change from “high impedance”
to 50 ohms, the displayed amplitude will drop in half.

181

OUTPut:POLarity?
Invert the waveform relative to the offset voltage. In the normal mode
(default), the waveform goes positive during the first part of the cycle.
In the inverted mode, the waveform goes negative during the first part of
the cycle. The :POL? query returns “NORM” or “INV”.
• As shown in the examples below, the waveform is inverted relative to

the offset voltage. Any offset voltage present will remain unchanged
when the waveform is inverted.
Normal Inverted
Normal Inverted
Offset
0V 0V
4
No Offset Voltage With Offset Voltage
• When a waveform is inverted, the Sync signal associated with the

waveform is not inverted.
OUTPut:SYNC {OFF|ON}
OUTPut:SYNC?
Disable or enable the front-panel Sync connector. At lower amplitudes,
you can reduce output distortion by disabling the Sync signal. The default
setting is “ON”. The :SYNC? query returns “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
• For more details on the Sync signal for each waveform function,
see “Sync Output Signal” on page 66.
• When the Sync signal is disabled, the output level on the Sync
connector is a logic “low” level.
• When a waveform is inverted (OUTP:POL command), the Sync signal

associated with the waveform is not inverted.
• The OUTP:SYNC command is overridden by the setting of the MARK

command used with the sweep mode (see page 210). Therefore,
when the marker frequency is enabled (and the sweep mode is also
enabled), the OUTP:SYNC command is ignored.
182

VOLTage:UNIT?
Select the units for output amplitude (does not affect offset voltage or
high/low levels). The default is VPP. The :UNIT? query returns “VPP”,
“VRMS”, or “DBM”.
• The function generator uses the current units selection for both front
panel and remote interface operations. For example, if you select
“VRMS” from the remote interface using the VOLT:UNIT command,
the units are displayed as “VRMS” on the front panel.
• The VOLT? query command (see page 174) returns the output
amplitude in the units set by the most recent VOLT:UNIT command.
• The output units for amplitude cannot be set to dBm if the output
automatically converted to Vpp. See the OUTP:LOAD command on
• Unless you specify the units as part of the APPLy or VOLT command, 4
the VOLT:UNIT command takes precedence. For example, if you
select “Vrms” using the VOLT:UNIT command and do not include
units with the APPLy or VOLT command, the value specified for the
amplitude parameter in the APPLy command will be in “Vrms”.
183


See also “Pulse Waveforms” starting on page 68 in chapter 3.
This section describes the low-level commands used to program the
function generator to output a pulse waveform. To select the pulse
function, use the FUNC PULS command (see page 171). Refer to the
diagram below for the command descriptions that follow.
90% 90%
50% 50%
Pulse Width
10% 10%
4 Rise Time Fall Time

Period
PULSe:PERiod? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the period for pulses. Select a period from 200 ns to 1000 seconds.
The default is 1 ms. MIN = 200 ns. MAX = 1000 seconds. The PULS:PER?
query returns the period of the pulse waveform in seconds.
• The specified period must be greater than the sum of the pulse width
and the edge time. The function generator will adjust the edge time
and the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period.
From the remote interface, a “Settings conflict” error will be generated.
The edge time is minimized first, and then the width (or duty cycle) is
adjusted as shown below.
Period > Pulse Width + (1.6 X Edge Time)
or in terms of pulse duty cycle:
Period > (Period X Duty Cycle ÷ 100) + (1.6 X Edge Time)
184

• This command affects the period (and frequency) for all waveform
functions (not just pulse). For example, if you select a period using the
PULS:PER command and then change the function to sine wave,
the specified period will be used for the new function.
• Function Limitations: If you change to a function whose minimum

period is greater than that for a pulse waveform, the period is adjusted
to the minimum value allowed for the new function. For example,
if you output a pulse waveform with a period of 200 ns and then change
the period to 10 µs (the lower limit for ramps). From the remote
interface, a “Settings conflict” error will be generated and the period
will be adjusted as described.
FUNCtion:PULSe:HOLD {WIDTh|DCYCle}
FUNCtion:PULSe:HOLD? [WIDTh|DCYCle]
Set the function generator to hold either pulse width or pulse duty cycle:
• WIDTh: The function generator holds the pulse width setting (in
seconds) constant as the period is varied. (Minimum width and edge
4
time restrictions apply.) If a command to set a duty cycle value is
received, the duty cycle is converted to the equivalent pulse width in
seconds. If Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) is turned on, the pulse
width is held, and the width deviation also is held, as the period is
varied. Duty cycle deviation commands are converted to width
deviation values.
• DCYCle: The function generator holds the pulse duty cycle setting (in
percent) constant as the period is varied. (Minimum width and edge
time restrictions apply.) If a command to set a pulse width value is
received, the width is converted to the equivalent duty cycle in
percent. If Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) is turned on, the pulse
duty cycle is held, and the duty cycle deviation also is held, as the
period is varied. Width deviation commands are converted to duty
cycle deviation values.
Note: The FUNC:PULS:HOLD command does not limit period settings.
The pulse width or duty cycle are adjusted if necessary to accommodate a
new period setting.
This command will cause the Width/Dty Cyc softkey in the pulse menu to
toggle its sense when appropriate. Also, changing the Width/Dty Cyc
softkey from the front panel will change the HOLD selection for subsequent
programmatic behavior.
185

FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
FUNCtion:PULSe:WIDTh? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the pulse width in seconds. The pulse width represents the time from
the 50% threshold of the rising edge of the pulse to the 50% threshold of
the next falling edge. You can vary the pulse width from 40 ns to
1000 seconds (see restrictions below). The default pulse width is 100 µs.
MIN = 40 ns. MAX = 999.99 seconds. The :WIDT? query returns the
pulse width in seconds.
• The minimum pulse width (Wmin) is affected by the period.

• The specified pulse width must also be less than the difference
between the period and the minimum pulse width as shown below.
The function generator will adjust the pulse edge time and then the
pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period. From the
4 remote interface, a “Settings conflict” error will be generated and the
pulse width will be adjusted as described.
Pulse Width < Period – Wmin
• The specified pulse width must be less than the difference between
the period and the edge time as shown below. The function generator
will limit the pulse edge time first, and then the pulse width as
needed to accommodate the specified period. From the remote
interface, a “Data out of range” error will be generated and the pulse
width will be limited as described.
• The pulse width must also be greater than the total time of one edge
as shown below.
Pulse Width > 1.6 X Edge Time
Note: This function is affected by the FUNC:PULS:HOLD command,

which determines the value to be held constant as the period is adjusted:
the specified pulse width value, or the specified pulse duty cycle value.
See the FUNC:PULS:HOLD command for further information.
186

FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle {<percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}
FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the pulse duty cycle in percent. The the pulse duty cycle is defined as:
Duty Cycle = 100 X Pulse Width ÷ Period

where the pulse width represents the time from the 50% threshold of the
The pulse duty cycle range is 0 percent to 100 percent. However, the
pulse duty cycle is limited by minimum pulse width and edge time
restrictions, which prevent you from setting exactly 0 percent or 100
percent. For example, for a 1 kHz pulse waveform, you are typically
restricted to pulse duty cycles in the range 0.002 percent to 99.998
percent, limited by the minimum pulse width of 40 ns.
The default pulse duty cycle is 10 percent. MIN is approximately 0%.

MAX is approximately 100%. The :DCYC? query returns the pulse duty
cycle in percent. The width and edge restrictions are described below:
4
restrictions determined by the minimum pulse width (Wmin). The
function generator will adjust the pulse duty cycle as needed to
accommodate the specified period. From the remote interface, a “Data
out of range” error will be generated and the duty cycle will
be adjusted as described.
Duty Cycle > 100 X Wmin ÷ Period
and
Duty Cycle < 100 X (1 – Wmin ÷ Period)
where:
187

• The specified pulse duty cycle may affect the edge time. The edge time
is adjusted first, and then the duty cycle to accommodate the specified
period, conforming to the following restriction. From the remote
interface, a “Data out of range” error will be generated and the edge
time and duty cycle will be limited as described.
Duty Cycle > 100 X (1.6 X Edge Time) ÷ Period
and
Duty Cycle < 100 X (1 – (1.6 X Edge Time) ÷ Period)
Note: This command is affected by the FUNC:PULS:HOLD command,

which determines the value to be held constant as the period is adjusted:
the specified pulse width value, or the specified pulse duty cycle value.
See the FUNC:PULS:HOLD command for further information.
FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
4 FUNCtion:PULSe:TRANsition? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the edge time in seconds for both the rising and falling edges.
The edge time represents the time from the 10% threshold to the 90%
threshold of each edge. You can vary the edge time from 20 ns to 100 ns
(see restrictions below). The default edge time is 20 ns. MIN = 20 ns.
MAX = 100 ns. The :TRAN? query returns the edge time in seconds.
• The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse width as
shown below. The function generator will limit the edge time as
needed to accommodate the specified pulse width or duty cycle.
From the remote interface, a “Settings Conflict” error will be generated
and the edge time will be limited as described.
or in terms of duty cycle:
188

Amplitude Modulation (AM) Commands

See also “Amplitude Modulation” starting on page 72 in chapter 3.
AM Overview
The following is an overview of the steps required to generate an
AM waveform. The commands used for AM are listed on the next page.
1 Configure the carrier waveform.

Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC, FREQ, VOLT, and
VOLT:OFFS commands to select the function, frequency, amplitude, and
offset of the carrier waveform. You can select a sine or square waveform
for the carrier (ramp, pulse, noise, dc, and arbitrary are not allowed).
2 Select the modulation source.

The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation 4
source. Select the modulation source using the AM:SOUR command.
For an external source, you can skip steps 3 and 4 below.
3 Select the shape of the modulating waveform.

You can modulate the carrier with a sine, square, ramp, noise, or
arbitrary waveform (pulse and dc are not allowed). Use the AM:INT:FUNC
command to select the modulating waveshape.

Set the modulating frequency to any value from 2 mHz to 20 kHz using
the AM:INT:FREQ command.
5 Set the modulation depth.

Set the modulation depth (also called “percent modulation”) to any value
from 0% to 120% using the AM:DEPT command.
6 Enable AM modulation.
After you have set up the other modulation parameters, use the
AM:STAT ON command to enable AM.
189

AM Commands
VOLT:OFFS commands to configure the carrier waveform.
AM:SOURce?
Select the source of the modulating signal. The function generator will
accept an internal or external modulation source. The default is INT.
The :SOUR? query returns “INT” or “EXT”.

with an external waveform. The modulation depth is controlled by the
±5V signal level present on the rear-panel Modulation In connector.
For example, if you have set the modulation depth to 100% using the
4 AM:DEPT command, then when the modulating signal is at +5 volts,
the output will be at the maximum amplitude. When the modulating
signal is at -5 volts, then the output will be at the minimum amplitude.
AM:INTernal
:FUNCtion?
Select the shape of the modulating waveform. Used only when the
Internal modulation source is selected (AM:SOUR INT command). You can
use noise as the modulating waveshape, but you cannot use ramp, noise,
pulse, dc, or arbitrary as the carrier waveform. The default is SIN.
The :FUNC? query returns “SIN”, “SQU”, “RAMP”, “NRAM”, “TRI”,
“NOIS”, or “USER”.
• Select “SQU” for a square waveform with a 50% duty cycle.

• Select “RAMP” for a ramp waveform with 100% symmetry.
• Select “TRI” for a ramp waveform with 50% symmetry.
• Select “NRAM” (negative ramp) for a ramp waveform
with 0% symmetry.
190

• If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape

(“USER”), the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points.
Extra waveform points are removed using decimation.
AM:INTernal:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
AM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the frequency of the modulating waveform. Used only when the
Internal modulation source is selected (AM:SOUR INT command).
Select from 2 mHz to 20 kHz. The default is 100 Hz. MIN = 2 mHz.
MAX = 20 kHz. The :FREQ? query returns the internal modulating
frequency in hertz.

AM:DEPTh? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the internal modulation depth (or “percent modulation”) in percent. 4
Select from 0% to 120%. The default is 100%. MIN = 0%. MAX = 120%.
The :DEPT? query returns the modulation depth in percent.
• Note that even at greater than 100% depth, the function generator
will not exceed ±5V peak on the output (into a 50Ω load).
• If you select the External modulating source (AM:SOUR EXT command),

the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform.
The modulation depth is controlled by the ±5V signal level present
on the rear-panel Modulation In connector. For example, if you have
set the modulation depth to 100% using the AM:DEPT command,
then when the modulating signal is at +5 volts, the output will be at
the maximum amplitude. When the modulating signal is at -5 volts,
then the output will be at the minimum amplitude.
191

AM:STATe {OFF|ON}
AM:STATe?
Disable or enable AM. To avoid multiple waveform changes, you can
enable AM after you have set up the other modulation parameters.
The default is OFF. The :STAT? query returns “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).

enabled at a time. For example, you cannot enable AM and FM at the
same time. When you enable AM, the previous modulation mode is
turned off.
• The function generator will not allow AM to be enabled at the same

time that sweep or burst is enabled. When you enable AM, the sweep
192

Frequency Modulation (FM) Commands

See also “Frequency Modulation” starting on page 77 in chapter 3.
FM Overview
The following is an overview of the steps required to generate an
FM waveform. The commands used for FM are listed on the next page.
1 Configure the carrier waveform.

offset of the carrier waveform. You can select a sine or square waveform
for the carrier (ramp, pulse, noise, dc, and arbitrary are not allowed).

The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation 4
source. Select the modulation source using the FM:SOUR command.

arbitrary waveform (pulse and dc are not allowed). Use the FM:INT:FUNC
command to select the modulating waveshape.

the FM:INT:FREQ command.
5 Set the peak frequency deviation.

Set the frequency deviation to any value from 1 mHz to 5 MHz using the
FM:DEV command.
6 Enable FM modulation.
FM:STAT ON command to enable FM.
193

FM Commands
FM:SOURce?

with an external waveform. The frequency deviation is controlled
by the ±5V signal level present on the rear-panel Modulation In
connector. For example, if you have set the deviation to 100 kHz
4 using the FM:DEV command, then a +5V signal level corresponds to a
100 kHz increase in frequency. Lower external signal levels produce
less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the frequency below
the carrier frequency.
FM:INTernal
:FUNCtion?
Internal modulation source is selected (FM:SOUR INT command). You can
use noise as the modulating waveshape, but you cannot use ramp, noise,
pulse, dc, or arbitrary as the carrier waveform. The default is SIN.

with 0% symmetry.
194


FM:INTernal:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
FM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Internal modulation source is selected (FM:SOUR INT command).
frequency in hertz.

FM:DEViation? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the peak frequency deviation in hertz. This value represents the 4
peak variation in frequency of the modulated waveform from the carrier
frequency. Select any value from 1 mHz to 5 MHz. The default is 100 Hz.
MIN = 1 mHz. MAX = based on the frequency of the carrier waveform as
shown below. The :DEV? query returns the deviation in hertz.
Max. Deviation = Carrier

-------------------- For Carrier < 5 MHz
2
Max. Deviation = Max. Frequency – Carrier-

----------------------------------------------------------------------- For Carrier > 5 MHz
2

deviation. If you attempt to set the deviation to a value greater than
the carrier frequency (with FM enabled), the function generator will
automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum value allowed with
the present carrier frequency. From the remote interface, a “Data out
of range” error will be generated and the deviation will be adjusted
as described.
195

• The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or
deviation to a value that is not valid, the function generator will
automatically adjust it to the maximum value allowed with the
present carrier frequency. From the remote interface, a “Data out of
range” error will be generated and the deviation will be adjusted as
described.
• If the deviation causes the carrier waveform to exceed a frequency

boundary for the current duty cycle (square waveform only),
the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to the
maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency. From the
duty cycle will be adjusted as described.
• If you select the External modulating source (FM:SOUR EXT command),

the deviation is controlled by the ±5V signal level present on the rear-
panel Modulation In connector. For example, if you have set the
4 frequency deviation to 100 kHz, then a +5V signal level corresponds
to a 100 kHz increase in frequency. Lower external signal levels
produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the
frequency below the carrier frequency.
FM:STATe {OFF|ON}
FM:STATe?
Disable or enable FM. To avoid multiple waveform changes, you can
enable FM after you have set up the other modulation parameters.

enabled at a time. For example, you cannot enable FM and AM at the
same time. When you enable FM, the previous modulation mode is
turned off.
• The function generator will not allow FM to be enabled at the same

time that sweep or burst is enabled. When you enable FM, the sweep
196

Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Commands

See also “Pulse Width Modulation” on page 93 in chapter 3.
PWM Overview
The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a
PWM waveform. The PWM commands are listed on the next page.
1 Configure the carrier (pulse) waveform.

offset of the pulse waveform. PWM is supported only for pulse.

source. Select the modulation source using the PWM:SOUR command. 4

arbitrary waveform (pulse and dc are not allowed). Use the
PWM:INT:FUNC command to select the modulating waveshape.

the PWM:INT:FREQ command.
5 Set the pulse width or pulse duty cycle deviation.

Set the Width Deviation to a value from 0 to the current Pulse Width
or Period - Pulse Width, whichever is smaller, using the PWM:DEV
command. Or, set the Duty Cycle Deviation to a value from 0 to the
current Duty Cycle or 100 - Duty Cycle, whichever is smaller, using
the PWM:DEV:DCYC command.
6 Enable PWM modulation.

PWM:STAT ON command to enable PWM.
197

PWM Commands
PWM:SOURce?

with an external waveform. The pulse width or pulse duty cycle
deviation is controlled by the ±5V signal level present on the rear-
panel Modulation In connector. For example, if you have set the pulse
4 width deviation to 50 µs using the PWM:DEV command, then a +5V
signal level corresponds to a 50 µs width increase. Lower external
signal levels produce less deviation.
PWM:INTernal
:FUNCtion?
Internal modulation source is selected (PWM:SOUR INT command).
(The carrier must be a pulse waveform for PWM.) The default is SIN.

with 0% symmetry.
198


PWM:INTernal:FREQuency {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
PWM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Internal modulation source is selected (PWM:SOUR INT command).
frequency in hertz.
PWM:DEViation {<deviation in seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}

PWM:DEViation? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the pulse width deviation in seconds. This value represents the 4
variation in width (in seconds) from the pulse width of the carrier pulse
waveform. The default is 10 µs. MIN = 0 s. MAX = 500 s (limited by the
period, minimum pulse width, and edge time). The :DEV? query returns
the pulse width deviation in seconds.
• The pulse width deviation cannot exceed the current pulse width.
• The pulse width deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width
(Wmin):
Width Deviation < Pulse Width – Wmin
and
Width Deviation < Period – Pulse Width – Wmin
where:
199

• The pulse width deviation is limited by the current edge time setting.
Width Deviation < Pulse Width – (1.6 X Edge Time)
and
Width Deviation < Period – Pulse Width – (1.6 X Edge Time)
• If you select the External modulating source (PWM:SOUR EXT

command), the deviation is controlled by the ±5V signal level present
set the width deviation to 10 µs, then a +5V signal level corresponds
to a 10 µs deviation. Lower external signal levels produce less
deviation, and negative signal levels produce negative deviation.
Note: The operation of the PWM:DEV command is affected by the
FUNC:PULS:HOLD command (see “Pulse Configuration Commands” on
page 184 for further information). The FUNC:PULS:HOLD command
determines whether pulse width (the default) or pulse duty cycle values
are to be held constant as the period is varied. If the width is held, so is
4 the width deviation. If the duty cycle is held, so is the duty cycle deviation.
If duty cycle and duty cycle deviation are being held, width deviation
values specified with the PWM:DEV command are automatically
converted to the equivalent duty cycle deviation in percent.
PWM:DEViation:DCYCle {<deviation in percent>|MINimum|MAXimum}

PWM:DEViation:DCYCle? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the duty cycle deviation in percent (percent of period). This value
represents the peak variation in duty cycle from the duty cycle of the
underlying pulse waveform. For example, if duty cycle is 10% and duty
cycle deviation is 5%, the duty cycle of the modulated waveform will vary
from 5% to 15%. The default is 1 percent. MIN is approximately 0%.
MAX is approximately 100% (limited by the period, minimum pulse
width, and edge time). The :DEV:DCYC? query returns the duty cycle
deviation in percent.
• The duty cycle deviation cannot exceed the current pulse duty cycle.
200

• The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width
(Wmin):
Duty Cycle Deviation < Duty Cycle – 100 X Wmin ÷ Period
and
Duty Cycle Deviation < 100 – Duty Cycle – 100 X Wmin ÷ Period
where:
• The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the current edge time
setting.
Duty Cycle Dev < Duty Cycle – (160 X Edge Time) ÷ Period
and
Duty Cycle Dev < 100 – Duty Cycle – (160 X Edge Time) ÷ Period 4
• If you select the External modulating source (PWM:SOUR EXT
command), the deviation is controlled by the ±5V signal level present
set the duty cycle deviation to 5 percent, a +5V signal level
corresponds to a 5 percent deviation, that is an additional 5% of
period added to the pulse duty cycle. Lower external signal levels
produce less deviation, and negative signal levels reduce the duty
cycle.
Note: The operation of the PWM:DEV:DCYC command is affected by the
FUNC:PULS:HOLD command (see “Pulse Configuration Commands” on
page 184 for further information). The FUNC:PULS:HOLD command
determines whether pulse width (the default) or pulse duty cycle values
are to be held constant as the period is varied. If the width is held, so is
the width deviation. If the duty cycle is held, so is the duty cycle deviation.
If pulse width and width deviation are being held, duty cycle deviation
values specified with the PWM:DEV:DCYC command are automatically
converted to the equivalent width deviation in seconds.
201

PWM:STATe {OFF|ON}
PWM:STATe?
Disable or enable PWM. To avoid multiple waveform changes, you can
enable PWM after you have set up the other modulation parameters.

enabled at a time. For example, you cannot enable PWM and AM at
the same time. When you enable PWM, the previous modulation
mode is turned off.
• The function generator will not allow PWM to be enabled at the same
time that sweep or burst is enabled. When you enable PWM, the
sweep or burst mode is turned off.
• PWM is allowed only when pulse is the selected function.
202

Frequency Sweep Commands

See also “Frequency Sweep” starting on page 90 in chapter 3.
Sweep Overview
The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a sweep.
The commands used for sweep are listed on page 205.
1 Select the waveform shape, amplitude, and offset.

Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC, FREQ, VOLT,
and VOLT:OFFS commands to select the function, frequency, amplitude,
and offset. You can select a sine, square, or ramp waveform (pulse, noise,
dc, and arbitrary are not allowed).
2 Select the frequency boundaries of the sweep.

You can set the frequency boundaries using one of two methods. 4
a Start Frequency/Stop Frequency: Use the FREQ:STAR command to
set the start frequency and the FREQ:STOP command to set the
stop frequency.
To sweep up in frequency, set the start frequency < stop frequency.
b Center Frequency/Frequency Span: Use the FREQ:CENT command
to set the center frequency and the FREQ:SPAN command to set the
frequency span.
To sweep up in frequency, set a positive span.
To sweep down in frequency, set a negative span.
3 Select the sweep mode.

Use the SWE:SPAC command to select linear or logarithmic spacing for
the sweep.
203

4 Set the sweep time.

Use the SWE:TIME command to set the number of seconds required to
sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency.
5 Select the sweep trigger source.

Use the TRIG:SOUR command to select the source from which the sweep
will be triggered.
6 Set the marker frequency. (Optional)

If desired, you can set the frequency at which the signal on the front-panel
Sync connector goes to a logic low during the sweep. Use the MARK:FREQ
command to set the marker frequency to any value between the start
frequency and stop frequency. Use the MARK ON command to enable the
frequency marker.
7 Enable the sweep mode.

4 After you have set up the other sweep parameters, use the SWE:STAT ON
command to enable the sweep mode.
204

Sweep Commands
FREQuency:STARt {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
FREQuency:STARt? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the start frequency (used in conjunction with the stop frequency).
Select from 1 mHz to 10 MHz (limited to 100 kHz for a ramp waveform).
The default is 100 Hz. MIN = 1 mHz. MAX = 10 MHz. The :STAR? query
returns the start frequency in hertz.
• To sweep up in frequency, set the start frequency < stop frequency.

FREQuency:STOP {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
FREQuency:STOP? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the stop frequency (used in conjunction with the start frequency).
The default is 1 kHz. MIN = 1 mHz. MAX = 10 MHz. The :STOP? query
returns the stop frequency in hertz.
4
205

FREQuency:CENTer {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
FREQuency:CENTer? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the center frequency (used in conjunction with the frequency span).
The default is 550 Hz. MIN = 1 mHz. MAX = based on the frequency
span and maximum frequency for the selected function as shown below.
The :CENT? query returns the center frequency in hertz.
Span
Center Frequency (max) = Max. Frequency – ---------------
2
• The following equation shows the relationship between the center
frequency and the start/stop frequency.
Stop Frequency – Start Frequency
Center Frequency = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
FREQuency:SPAN {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
FREQuency:SPAN? [MINimum|MAXimum]
4 Set the frequency span (used in conjunction with the center frequency).
Select from 0 Hz to 10 MHz (limited to 100 kHz for a ramp waveform).
The default is 900 Hz. MIN = 0 Hz. MAX = based on the center frequency
and maximum frequency for the selected function. The :SPAN? query
returns the span in hertz (can be a positive or negative value).
Frequency Span (max) = 2 X (Max. Frequency – Center Frequency)
• To sweep up in frequency, set a positive frequency span.

To sweep down in frequency, set a negative frequency span.
• The following equation shows the relationship between the span and
the start/stop frequency.
Frequency Span = Stop Frequency – Start Frequency
206

SWEep:SPACing?
Select linear or logarithmic spacing for the sweep. The default is Linear.
The :SPAC? query returns “LIN” or “LOG”.
• For a linear sweep, the function generator varies the output frequency
in a linear fashion during the sweep.
• For a logarithmic sweep, the function generator varies the output

frequency in a logarithmic fashion during the sweep.
SWEep:TIME {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
SWEep:TIME? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the number of seconds required to sweep from the start frequency
to the stop frequency. Select from 1 ms to 500 seconds. The default is
1 second. MIN = 1 ms. MAX = 500 seconds. The :TIME? query returns
the sweep time in seconds.
• The number of discrete frequency points in the sweep is automatically 4

calculated by the function generator and is based on the sweep time
that you select.
SWEep:STATe?
Disable or enable the sweep mode. To avoid multiple waveform changes,
you can enable the sweep mode after you have set up the other sweep
parameters. The default is OFF. The :STAT? query returns “0” (OFF) or
“1” (ON).
• The function generator will not allow the sweep mode to be enabled
at the same time that burst or any modulation mode is enabled.
When you enable sweep, the burst or modulation mode is turned off.
207

TRIGger:SOURce?
Select the source from which the function generator will accept a trigger.
The function generator will accept an immediate internal trigger, a
hardware trigger from the rear-panel Trig In connector, or a software
(bus) trigger. The default is IMM. The :SOUR? query returns “IMM”,
“EXT”, or “BUS”
• When the Immediate (internal) source is selected, the function

sweep time specified (SWE:TIME command) plus 1 ms.

The function generator initiates one sweep each time Trig In receives
a TTL pulse with the edge polarity specified by the TRIG:SLOP
command (see page 209). Note that the trigger period must be greater
than or equal to the specified sweep time plus 1 ms.
4 • When the Bus (software) source is selected, the function generator
initiates one sweep each time a bus trigger command is received.
To trigger the function generator from the remote interface (GPIB,
USB, or LAN), send the *TRG (trigger) command. The front-
panel key is illuminated when the function generator is waiting
for a bus trigger.
• The APPLy command automatically sets the trigger source to

Immediate (equivalent to TRIG:SOUR IMM command).
• To ensure synchronization when the Bus source is selected, send the

*WAI (wait) command. When the *WAI command is executed, the
function generator waits for all pending operations to complete before
executing any additional commands. For example, the following
command string guarantees that the first trigger is accepted and the
operation is executed before the second trigger is recognized.
TRIG:SOUR BUS;*TRG;*WAI;*TRG;*WAI
• You can use the *OPC? (operation complete query) command or the
*OPC (operation complete) command to signal when the sweep is
complete. The *OPC? command returns “1” to the output buffer when
the sweep is complete. The *OPC command sets the “Operation
Complete” bit (bit 0) in the Standard Event register when the sweep
is complete.
208

TRIGger:SLOPe?
Select whether the function generator uses the rising edge or falling edge
of the trigger signal on the rear-panel Trig In connector for an
externally-triggered sweep. The default is POS (rising edge).
The :SLOP? query returns “POS” or “NEG”.
OUTPut:TRIGger:SLOPe?
Select a rising or falling edge for the “trigger out” signal. When enabled
using the OUTP:TRIG command (see below), a TTL-compatible square
waveform with the specified edge is output from the rear-panel Trig Out
connector at the beginning of the sweep. Select “POS” to output a pulse
with a rising edge or select “NEG” to output a pulse with a falling edge.
The default is POS. The :SLOP? query returns “POS” or “NEG”.
• When the Immediate (internal) trigger source is selected

(TRIG:SOUR IMM command), the function generator outputs a square
waveform with a 50% duty cycle (the rising edge is the sweep trigger) 4
from the Trig Out connector. The period of the waveform is equal to
the specified sweep time (SWE:TIME command).
• When the External trigger source is selected (TRIG:SOUR EXT

command), the function generator automatically disables the
“trigger out” signal. The rear-panel Trig Out connector cannot be
used for both operations at the same time (an externally-triggered
sweep uses the same connector to trigger the sweep).
• When the Bus (software) trigger source is selected (TRIG:SOUR BUS

command), the function generator outputs a pulse (>1 µs pulse width)
from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each sweep.
OUTPut:TRIGger?
Disable or enable the “trigger out” signal. When enabled, a TTL-
compatible square waveform with the specified edge (OUTP:TRIG:SLOP
command) is output from the rear-panel Trig Out connector at the
beginning of the sweep. The default is OFF. The :TRIG? query returns
“0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
209

MARKer:FREQuency? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the marker frequency. This is the frequency at which the signal
on the front-panel Sync connector goes to a logic low during the sweep.
The Sync signal always goes from low to high at the beginning of the
sweep. Select from 1 mHz to 10 MHz (limited to 100 kHz for a ramp
waveform). The default is 500 Hz. MIN = the start or stop frequency
(whichever is lower). MAX = the start frequency or stop frequency
(whichever is higher). The :FREQ? query returns the marker frequency
in hertz.
• When sweep is enabled, the marker frequency must be between the

specified start frequency and stop frequency. If you attempt to set the
marker frequency to a frequency not in this range, the function
generator will automatically set the marker frequency equal to the
start frequency or stop frequency (whichever is closer). From the
remote interface, a “Settings conflict” error will be generated and
the marker frequency will be adjusted as described.
4
MARKer {OFF|ON}
MARKer?
Disable or enable the frequency marker. When the frequency marker
is disabled, the signal output from the Sync connector is the normal
Sync signal for the carrier waveform (see “Sync Output Signal” on
page 66). The default is OFF. The MARK? query returns “0” (OFF) or
“1” (ON).
• The OUTP:SYNC command is overridden by the setting of the MARK

command. Therefore, when the marker frequency is enabled (and the
sweep mode is also enabled), the OUTP:SYNC command is ignored
210

Burst Mode Commands
Burst Mode Commands

See also “Burst Mode” starting on page 97 in chapter 3.
Burst Mode Overview

The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a burst.
You can use burst in one of two modes as described below. The function
generator enables one burst mode at a time.
• Triggered Burst Mode: In this mode (also called N Cycle Burst), the
function generator outputs a waveform with a specified number of
cycles (burst count) each time a trigger is received. After the specified
number of cycles have been output, the function generator stops and
waits for the next trigger. You can configure the function generator to
use an internal trigger to initiate the burst, or you can provide an
external (manual) trigger by pressing the front-panel key,
applying a trigger signal to the rear-panel Trig In connector, or by
sending a software trigger command from the remote interface.
4
• External Gated Burst Mode: In this mode, the output waveform is
either “on” or “off ” based on the level of the external signal applied
to the rear-panel Trig In connector. When the gate signal is true,
the function generator outputs a continuous waveform. When the
gate signal goes false, the current waveform cycle is completed and
then the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level
corresponding to the starting burst phase of the selected waveform.
Burst Mode Burst Count Burst Period Burst Phase Trigger Source
(BURS:MODE) (BURS:NCYC) (BURS:INT:PER) (BURS:PHAS) (TRIG:SOUR)

TRIGgered Available Available Available IMMediate
Internal Trigger

TRIGgered Available Not Used Available EXTernal, BUS
External Trigger
Gated Burst Mode:

GATed Not Used Not Used Available Not Used
External Trigger
211

Burst Mode Commands
1 Configure the burst waveform.

VOLT:OFFS commands to select the function, frequency, amplitude,
and offset of the waveform. You can select a sine, square, or ramp
waveform (pulse, noise, dc, and arbitrary are not allowed). For
internally-triggered bursts, the minimum frequency is 2.001 mHz. For
sine and square waveforms, frequencies above 3 MHz are allowed only
with an “infinite” burst count.
2 Select the “triggered” or gated burst mode.

Select the triggered burst mode (called “N Cycle” on the front panel) or
external gated burst mode using the BURS:MODE command.
3 Set the burst count.

Set the burst count (the number of cycles per burst) to any value between
1 and 50,000 cycles (or infinite) using the BURS:NCYC command. Used in
the triggered burst mode only.
4
4 Set the burst period.
Set the burst period (the interval at which internally-triggered bursts
are generated) to any value from 1 µs to 500 seconds using the
BURS:INT:PER command. Used only in the triggered burst mode with an
internal trigger source.
5 Set the burst starting phase.

Set the starting phase of the burst to any value from -360 degrees to
+360 degrees using the BURS:PHAS command.
6 Select the trigger source.

Select the trigger source using the TRIG:SOUR command. Used in the
triggered burst mode only.
7 Enable the burst mode.

After you have set up the other burst parameters, use the BURS:STAT ON
command to enable the burst mode.
212

Burst Mode Commands
Burst Mode Commands
VOLT:OFFS commands to configure the waveform. For internally-
triggered bursts, the minimum frequency is 2.001 mHz. For sine and
square waveforms, frequencies above 3 MHz are allowed only with an
“infinite” burst count.
BURSt:MODE?
Select the burst mode. In the triggered mode, the function generator
outputs a waveform with a specified number of cycles (burst count) each
time a trigger is received from the specified trigger source (TRIG:SOUR
command). In the gated mode, the output waveform is either “on” or “off ”
based on the level of the external signal applied to the rear-panel
Trig In connector. The default is TRIG. The :MODE? query returns 4
“TRIG” or “GAT”.
• When the gated mode is selected, the waveform generator either runs
or stops based on the logic level of the gate signal applied to the rear-
panel Trig In connector. You can select the polarity of the Trig In
connector using the BURS:GATE:POL command (see page 218).
When the gate signal is true, the function generator outputs a
continuous waveform. When the gate signal goes false, the current
waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops
while remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting
burst phase of the selected waveform.
• When the gated mode is selected, the burst count, burst period,
and trigger source are ignored (these parameters are used for the
triggered burst mode only). If a manual trigger is received (TRIG
command), it is ignored and no error will be generated.
213

Burst Mode Commands

BURSt:NCYCles? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the number of cycles to be output per burst (triggered burst mode only).
Select from 1 cycle to 50,000 cycles, in 1 cycle increments (see the
restrictions below). The default is 1 cycle. MIN = 1 cycle. MAX = based on
the burst period and frequency as shown below. Select INF to generate a
continuous burst waveform. The :NCYC? query returns the burst count
from 1 to 50,000 or “9.9E+37” (for an infinite count).
• If the Immediate trigger source is selected (TRIG:SOUR IMM command),

the burst count must be less than the product of the maximum burst
period and the waveform frequency as shown below.
Burst Count < Maximum Burst Period X Waveform Frequency
• The function generator will automatically increase the burst period

up to its maximum value to accommodate the specified burst count
(but the waveform frequency will not be changed). From the remote
4 interface, a “Settings conflict” error will be generated and the burst
period will be adjusted as described.
• For sine and square waveforms, frequencies above 3 MHz are allowed
only with an “infinite” burst count.
• When the gated burst mode is selected, the burst count is ignored.
However, if you change the burst count while in the gated mode,
the function generator remembers the new count and will use it when
the triggered mode is selected.
214

Burst Mode Commands
BURSt:INTernal:PERiod? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the burst period for internally-triggered bursts. The burst period
defines time from the start of one burst to the start of the next burst.
Select from 1 µs to 500 seconds. The default is 10 ms. MAX = 500 s.
MIN = based on the burst count and waveform frequency as shown below.
The :PER? query returns the burst period in seconds.
• The burst period setting is used only when Immediate triggering is

enabled (TRIG:SOUR IMM command). The burst period is ignored
when manual or external triggering is enabled (or when gated burst
mode is selected).
• It is not possible to specify a burst period which is too short for the
re-trigger the burst. From the remote interface, a “Data out of range”
error will be generated and the burst period will be adjusted as described. 4
Burst Count
Burst Period > ----------------------------------------------------------- + 200 ns
Waveform Frequency
BURSt:PHASe? [MINimum|MAXimum]
Set the starting phase for the burst in degrees or radians as specified
by the previous UNIT:ANGL command. Select from -360 degrees to
+360 degrees or -2π to +2π radians. The default is 0 degrees (0 radians).
MIN = -360 degrees (-2π radians). MAX = +360 degrees (+2π).
The :PHAS? query returns the starting phase in degrees or radians.
• For sine, square, and ramp waveforms, 0 degrees is the point at which
the waveform crosses zero volts (or the dc offset value) in a positive-
going direction.
• The burst phase is also used in the gated burst mode. When the gate
the function generator stops. The output will remain at the voltage
level corresponding to the starting burst phase.
215

Burst Mode Commands
BURSt:STATe?
Disable or enable the burst mode. To avoid multiple waveform changes,
you can enable the burst mode after you have set up the other burst
parameters. The default is OFF. The :STAT? query returns “0” (OFF) or
“1” (ON).
• The function generator will not allow the burst mode to be enabled
at the same time that sweep or any modulation mode is enabled.
When you enable burst, the sweep or modulation mode is turned off.
UNIT:ANGLe?
Select degrees or radians to set the starting phase for the burst with the
BURS:PHAS command (remote interface only). The default is DEG.
The :ANGL? query returns “DEG” or “RAD”.
• From the front panel, the starting phase is always displayed in degrees
4 (radians are not available). If you set the starting phase in radians
from the remote interface and then return to front-panel operation,
you will see that the function generator converts the phase to degrees.
TRIGger:SOURce?
Select the trigger source for the triggered burst mode only. In the
triggered burst mode, the function generator outputs a waveform with
the specified number of cycles (burst count) each time a trigger is
received. After the specified number of cycles have been output,
the function generator stops and waits for the next trigger. The default
is IMM. The :SOUR? query returns “IMM,” “EXT”, or “BUS”.
• When the Immediate (internal) source is selected, the frequency at

which the burst is generated is determined by the burst period
(BURS:INT:PER command).

The function generator outputs the specified number of cycles each
time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the edge polarity specified by
the TRIG:SLOP command (see page 217). External trigger signals
that occur during a burst are ignored.
216

Burst Mode Commands
• When the Bus (software) source is selected, the function generator

outputs one burst each time a bus trigger command is received.
To trigger the function generator from the remote interface (GPIB,
USB, or LAN), send the *TRG (trigger) command. The front-
panel key is illuminated when the function generator is waiting
for a bus trigger.
• When the External or Bus trigger source is selected, the burst count
and burst phase remain in effect but the burst period is ignored.


4
*OPC (operation complete) command to signal when the burst is
complete. The *OPC? command returns “1” to the output buffer when
the burst is complete. The *OPC command sets the “Operation Complete”
bit (bit 0) in the Standard Event register when the burst is complete.
TRIGger:SLOPe?
Select whether the function generator uses the rising edge or falling
edge of the trigger signal on the rear-panel Trig In connector for an
externally-triggered burst. The default is POS (rising edge). The :SLOP?
query returns “POS” or “NEG”.
217

Burst Mode Commands
BURSt:GATE:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}
Select whether the function generator uses true-high or true-low logic
levels on the rear-panel Trig In connector for an externally-gated burst.
The default is NORM (true-high logic). The :POL? query returns
“NORM” or “INV”.
connector at the beginning of the burst. Select “POS” to output a pulse
with a rising edge or select “NEG” to output a pulse with a falling edge.
The default is POS. The :SLOP? query returns “POS” or “NEG”.

(TRIG:SOUR IMM command), the function generator outputs a
4 square waveform with a 50% duty cycle from the Trig Out connector.
The period of the waveform is equal to the specified burst period
(BURS:INT:PER command).

command) or when the Gated mode is selected (BURS:MODE GAT
command;), the function generator automatically disables the “trigger
out” signal. The rear-panel Trig Out connector cannot be used for
both operations at the same time (an externally-triggered waveform
uses the same connector to trigger the burst).

from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each burst.
OUTPut:TRIGger?
Disable or enable the “trigger out” signal (used with burst and sweep only).
When enabled, a TTL-compatible square waveform with the specified
edge (OUTP:TRIG:SLOP command) is output from the rear-panel
Trig Out connector at the beginning of the burst. The default is OFF.
The :TRIG? query returns “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
218

Triggering Commands
Triggering Commands
Applies to Sweep and Burst only. See also “Triggering” starting on
page 106 in chapter 3.
TRIGger:SOURce?
Select the source from which the function generator will accept a trigger.
The function generator will accept an immediate internal trigger, a
hardware trigger from the rear-panel Trig In connector, or a software
(bus) trigger. The default is IMM. The :SOUR? query returns “IMM”,
“EXT”, or “BUS”
• When the Immediate (internal) source is selected, the function

generator outputs continuously when the sweep mode or burst mode
is enabled.
• When the External source is selected, the function generator will 4

The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each
time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the edge polarity specified by
the TRIG:SLOP command (see page 220).
• When the Bus (software) source is selected, the function generator

initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time a bus trigger
command is received. To trigger the function generator from the
remote interface (GPIB, USB, or LAN) when the Bus source selected,
send the *TRG (trigger) command. The front-panel key is
illuminated when the function generator is waiting for a bus trigger.

219

Triggering Commands

*OPC (operation complete) command to signal when the sweep or
burst is complete. The *OPC? command returns “1” to the output
buffer when the sweep or burst is complete. The *OPC command sets
the “Operation Complete” bit (bit 0) in the Standard Event register
when the sweep or burst is complete.
TRIGger
Trigger a sweep or burst from the remote interface. This command can
4 be used with any of the available trigger sources (TRIG:SOUR command).
For example, you can issue a trigger from the remote interface and use
the command with any of the available trigger sources (TRIG:SOUR
command).
*TRG
Trigger a sweep or burst from the remote interface only if the bus
(software) trigger source is currently selected (TRIG:SOUR BUS command).
TRIGger:SLOPe?
Select whether the function generator uses the rising edge or falling edge
of the trigger signal on the rear-panel Trig In connector. The default is
POS (rising edge). The :SLOP? query returns “POS” or “NEG”.
BURSt:GATE:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}
Select whether the function generator uses true-high or true-low logic
levels on the rear-panel Trig In connector for an externally-gated burst.
The default is NORM (true-high logic). The :POL? query returns
“NORM” or “INV”.
220

Triggering Commands
connector at the beginning of the sweep or burst. Select “POS” to output a
pulse with a rising edge or select “NEG” to output a pulse with a falling
edge. The default is POS. The :SLOP? query returns “POS” or “NEG”.

(TRIG:SOUR IMM command), the function generator outputs a square
waveform with a 50% duty cycle from the Trig Out connector. The
period of the waveform is equal to the specified sweep time (SWE:TIME
command) or burst period (BURS:INT:PER command) plus 1 ms.

“trigger out” signal. The rear-panel Trig Out connector cannot be
used for both operations at the same time (an externally-triggered
waveform uses the same connector to trigger the sweep or burst).
4
from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each sweep or burst.
OUTPut:TRIGger?
Disable or enable the “trigger out” signal (used for sweep and burst only).
When enabled, a TTL-compatible square waveform with the specified
edge (OUTP:TRIG:SLOP command) is output from the rear-panel
Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep or burst. The default
is OFF. The :TRIG? query returns “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
221

Arbitrary Waveform Commands (Option 002)

See also “Optional Arbitrary Waveforms (Option 002)” starting on page
112 in chapter 3.
Arbitrary Waveform Overview

The following is an overview of the steps required to download and
output an arbitrary waveform over the remote interface. The commands
used for arbitrary waveforms are listed on page 224. Refer to chapter 7,
“Tutorial”, for more information on the internal operation of downloading
and outputting an arbitrary waveform.
Note. You can download waveforms of up to 8,192 (8K) points into the
4 Agilent 33210A from your PC.
Chapter 6, “Application Programs”, includes an example program

showing how to download an arbitrary waveform into the Agilent
33210A.
1 Download the waveform points into volatile memory.

You can download from 1 point (a dc signal) to 8,192 (8K) points per
waveform. You can download the points as floating-point values, binary
integer values, or decimal integer values. Use the DATA command to
download floating-point values from -1.0 to +1.0. Use the DATA:DAC
command to download binary integer or decimal integer values from
-8191 to +8191.
To ensure that binary data is downloaded properly, you must select the
order in which the bytes are downloaded using the FORM:BORD command.
2 Select the waveform frequency, amplitude, and offset.

Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FREQ, VOLT, and VOLT:OFFS
commands to select the frequency, amplitude, and offset of the waveform.
222

3 Copy the arbitrary waveform to non-volatile memory.

You can output the arbitrary waveform directly from volatile memory
or you can copy the waveform to non-volatile memory using the
DATA:COPY command.
4 Select the arbitrary waveform to output.

You can select one of the five built-in arbitrary waveforms, one of
four user-defined waveforms, or the waveform currently downloaded
to volatile memory. Use the FUNC:USER command to select the waveform.
5 Output the selected arbitrary waveform.

Use the FUNC USER command to output the waveform previously
selected with the FUNC:USER command.
The five built-in arbitrary waveforms are shown below.
Exponential Rise Exponential Fall Negative Ramp
Sinc Cardiac
223

Arbitrary Waveform Commands

*OPT?
Query whether optional arbitrary waveforms are currently enabled.
Returns “002” if arbitrary waveforms are enabled. Returns “0” if
arbitrary waveforms are not enabled.
Note: To upgrade your 33210A arbitrary waveform functionality (Option

002), go to www.agilent.com/find/ 33210U.
DATA VOLATILE, <value>, <value>, . . .

Download floating-point values from -1 to +1 into volatile memory.
You can download from 1 to 8,192 (8K) points per waveform.
The function generator takes the specified number of points and expands
them to fill waveform memory.
• The values -1 and +1 correspond to the peak values of the waveform

(if the offset is 0 volts). For example, if you set the amplitude to
4 10 Vpp (0V offset), “+1” corresponds to +5V and “-1” corresponds to -5V.
• The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points do not

span the full range of the output DAC (Digital-to-Analog Converter).
of values between ±1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is
6.087 Vpp (into 50 ohms).
• Downloading floating-point values (using DATA VOLATILE) is slower

than downloading binary values (using DATA:DAC VOLATILE) but is
more convenient when using trigonometric functions which return
values from -1 to +1.
• The DATA command overwrites the previous waveform in volatile

memory (and no error will be generated). Use the DATA:COPY
command to copy the waveform to non-volatile memory.
• Up to four user-defined waveforms can be stored in non-volatile

memory. Use the DATA:DEL command to delete the waveform in
volatile memory or any of the four user-defined waveforms in non-
volatile memory. Use the DATA:CAT? command to list all waveforms
currently stored in volatile and non-volatile memory (as well as the
five built-in waveforms).
• After downloading the waveform data to memory, use the FUNC:USER

command to choose the active waveform and the FUNC USER command
224

to output it.
• The following statement shows how to use the DATA command to

download seven points to volatile memory.
DATA VOLATILE, 1, .67, .33, 0, -.33, -.67, -1
DATA:DAC VOLATILE, {<binary block>|<value>, <value>, . . . }

Download binary or decimal integer values from -8191 to +8191 into
volatile memory. You can download from 1 to 8,192 (8K) points per
waveform in IEEE-488.2 binary block format or as a list of values.
The range of values corresponds to the values available using internal
14-bit DAC (Digital-to-Analog Converter) codes. The function generator
takes the specified number of points and expands them to fill waveform
memory.
• The values -8191 and +8191 correspond to the peak values of the
waveform (if the offset is 0 volts). For example, if you set the output
amplitude to 10 Vpp, “+8191” corresponds to +5V and “-8191”
corresponds to -5V.
4
span the full range of the output DAC. For example, the built-in
“Sinc” waveform does not use the full range of values between ±8191
and therefore its maximum amplitude is 6.087 Vpp (into 50 ohms).
• The DATA:DAC command overwrites the previous waveform in

volatile memory (and no error will be generated). Use the DATA:COPY
command to copy the waveform to non-volatile memory.

memory. Use the DATA:DEL command to delete the waveform in
volatile memory or any of the four user-defined waveforms in non-
volatile memory. Use the DATA:CAT? command to list all waveforms
currently stored in volatile and non-volatile memory (as well as the
five built-in waveforms).
• After downloading the waveform data to memory, use the FUNC:USER

command to choose the active waveform and the FUNC USER command
to output it.
225

• The following statement shows how to use the DATA:DAC command to

download seven integer points using the binary block format (see also
“Using the IEEE-488.2 Binary Block Format” below).
DATA:DAC VOLATILE, #214 Binary Data
• The following statement shows how to use the DATA:DAC command to

download five integer points in decimal format.
DATA:DAC VOLATILE, 8191, 4096, 0, -4096, -8191
Using the IEEE-488.2 Binary Block Format

In the binary block format, a block header precedes the waveform data.
The block header has the following format:
4 # 5 16384
Start of Even Number of Bytes to Follow

Data Block (16,384 bytes = 8,192 points)
Number of Digits
to Follow
The function generator represents binary data as 16-bit integers, which

are sent as two bytes. Therefore, the total number of bytes is always
twice the number of data points in the waveform (and must always be an
even number). For example, 16,384 bytes are required to download
a waveform with 8,192 points.
Use the FORM:BORD command to select the byte order for binary
transfers in block mode. If you specify FORM:BORD NORM (default),
the most-significant byte (MSB) of each data point is assumed first.
If you specify FORM:BORD SWAP, the least-significant byte (LSB) of
each data point is assumed first. Most computers use the “swapped”
byte order.
226

FORMat:BORDer {NORMal|SWAPped}
FORMat:BORDer?
Used for binary block transfers only. Select the byte order for binary
transfers in the block mode using the DATA:DAC command. The default
is NORM. The :BORD? query returns “NORM” or “SWAP”.
• In NORM byte order (default), the most-significant byte (MSB) of

each data point is assumed first.
• In SWAP byte order, the least-significant byte (LSB) of each data

point is assumed first. Most computers use the “swapped” byte order.
• The function generator represents binary data as signed 16-bit

integers, which are sent as two bytes. Therefore, each waveform data
point requires 16 bits, which must be transferred as two bytes on the
function generator’s interfaces.
DATA:COPY <destination arb name> [,VOLATILE]

Copy the waveform from volatile memory to the specified name in
non-volatile memory. The source for the copy is always “volatile”.
4
You cannot copy from any other source and you cannot copy to “volatile”.
• The arb name may contain up to 12 characters. The first character

must be a letter (A-Z), but the remaining characters can be numbers
(0-9) or the underscore character (“ _ ”). Blank spaces are not allowed.
If you specify a name with more than 12 characters, a “Program
mnemonic too long” error is generated.
• The VOLATILE parameter is optional and can be omitted. Note that

the keyword “VOLATILE” does not have a short form.
• The following built-in waveform names are reserved and cannot be

used with the DATA:COPY command: “EXP_RISE”, “EXP_FALL”,
“NEG_RAMP”, “SINC”, and “CARDIAC”. If you specify one of the
built-in waveforms, a “Cannot overwrite a built-in waveform” error is
generated.
• The function generator does not distinguish between upper- and

lower-case letters. Therefore, ARB_1 and arb_1 are the same name.
All characters are converted to upper case.
227

• If you copy to a waveform name that already exists, the previous

waveform is overwritten (and no error will be generated).
However, you cannot overwrite any of the five built-in waveforms.

memory. If memory is full and you try to copy a new waveform to non-
volatile memory, a “Not enough memory” error is generated. Use the
DATA:DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or
any of the four user-defined waveforms in non-volatile memory.
Use the DATA:CAT? command to list all waveforms currently stored
in volatile and non-volatile memory. The default selection is
EXP_RISE.
• The following statement shows how to use the DATA:COPY command

to copy the VOLATILE waveform into named storage “ARB_1”.
DATA:COPY ARB_1, VOLATILE
FUNCtion:USER {<arb name>|VOLATILE}

4 FUNCtion:USER?
Select one of the five built-in arbitrary waveforms, one of four user-defined
waveforms, or the waveform currently downloaded to volatile memory.
The :USER? query returns “EXP_RISE”, “EXP_FALL”, “NEG_RAMP”,
“SINC”, “CARDIAC”, “VOLATILE”, or the name of any user-defined
waveforms in non-volatile memory. The default selection is “EXP_RISE”.
• Note that this command does not output the selected arbitrary
waveform. Use the FUNC USER command (see the following page)
to output the selected waveform.
• The names of the five built-in arbitrary waveforms are:

“EXP_RISE”, “EXP_FALL”, “NEG_RAMP”, “SINC”, and “CARDIAC”.
• To select the waveform currently stored in volatile memory, specify

the VOLATILE parameter. The keyword “VOLATILE” does not have
a short form.
• If you select a waveform name that is not currently downloaded,

a “Specified arb waveform does not exist” error is generated.
228

• The function generator does not distinguish between upper- and

lower-case letters. Therefore, ARB_1 and arb_1 are the same name.
All characters are converted to upper case.
• Use the DATA:CAT? command to list the names of the five built-in
waveforms (non-volatile), “VOLATILE” if a waveform is currently
downloaded to volatile memory, and the names of any user-defined
waveforms (non-volatile).
FUNCtion USER
FUNCtion?
Select the arbitrary waveform function and output the current arbitrary
waveform. When executed, this command outputs the arbitrary
waveform currently selected by the FUNC:USER command (see the
previous page). The selected waveform is output using the current
frequency, amplitude, and offset voltage settings. The FUNC? query
returns “SIN”, “SQU”, “RAMP”, “PULS”, “NOIS”, “DC”, or “USER”.
• Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FREQ, VOLT, and

VOLT:OFFS commands to select the frequency, amplitude, and offset
4
of the waveform.

For example, the built-in “SINC” waveform does not use the full
range of binary values between ±1 and therefore its maximum
amplitude is 6.087 Vpp (into 50 ohms).

229

DATA:CATalog?
List the names of all waveforms currently available for selection.
Returns the names of the five built-in waveforms (non-volatile memory),
“VOLATILE” if a waveform is currently downloaded to volatile memory,
and all user-defined waveforms downloaded to non-volatile memory.
• A series of quoted strings separated with commas is returned as

shown in the example below.
"VOLATILE","EXP_RISE","EXP_FALL","NEG_RAMP",
"SINC","CARDIAC","TEST1_ARB","TEST2_ARB"
• Use the DATA:DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile

memory or any of the user-defined waveforms in non-volatile memory.
DATA:NVOLatile:CATalog?
List the names of all user-defined arbitrary waveforms downloaded to
non-volatile memory. Returns the names of up to four waveforms.
4
• A series of quoted strings separated with commas is returned as
shown in the example below. If no user-defined waveforms are
currently downloaded, the command returns a null string ( " " ).
"TEST1_ARB","TEST2_ARB","TEST3_ARB","TEST4_ARB"
• Use the DATA:DEL command to delete any of the user-defined

waveforms in non-volatile memory.
DATA:NVOLatile:FREE?
Query the number of non-volatile memory slots available to store user-
defined waveforms. Returns the number of memory slots available to
store user-defined waveforms. Returns “0” (memory is full), “1”, “2”, “3”,
or “4”.
230

DATA:DELete <arb name>

Delete the specified arbitrary waveform from memory. You can delete
the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user-defined
waveforms in non-volatile memory.
• You cannot delete the arbitrary waveform that is currently being

output. If you attempt to delete this waveform, a “Not able to delete
the currently selected active arb waveform” error is generated.
• You cannot delete any of the five built-in arbitrary waveforms. If you
attempt to delete one of these waveforms, a “Not able to delete a built-
in arb waveform” error is generated.
• Use the DATA:DEL:ALL command to delete the waveform in volatile

memory and all user-defined non-volatile waveforms all at once.
If one of the waveforms is currently being output, a “Not able to
delete the currently selected active arb waveform” error is generated.
DATA:DELete:ALL
Delete all user-defined arbitrary waveforms from memory. This command
4
deletes the waveform in volatile memory and all user-defined waveforms
in non-volatile memory. The five built-in waveforms in non-volatile
memory are not deleted.
• The colon before the ALL parameter is required (DATA:DELete:ALL).

If you insert a space instead of a colon, the function generator will
attempt to delete an arbitrary waveform with the name “ALL”. If no
such waveform is stored in memory, a “Specified arb waveform does
not exist” error is generated.
• Use the DATA:DEL <arb name> command to delete stored waveforms

one at a time.
• You cannot delete the arbitrary waveform that is currently being

output. If you attempt to delete this waveform, a “Not able to delete
the currently selected active arb waveform” error is generated.
• You cannot delete any of the five built-in arbitrary waveforms. If you
attempt to delete one of these waveforms, a “Not able to delete a built-
in arb waveform” error is generated.
231

DATA:ATTRibute:AVERage? [<arb name>]

Query the arithmetic average of all data points for the specified arbitrary
waveform (-1 ≤ average ≤ +1). The default arb name is the arbitrary
waveform currently active (selected with FUNC:USER command).
• If you query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory,

DATA:ATTRibute:CFACtor? [<arb name>]

Query the crest factor of all data points for the specified arbitrary
waveform. Crest factor is the ratio of the peak value to the RMS value of
the waveform. The default arb name is the arbitrary waveform currently
active (selected with FUNC:USER command).

DATA:ATTRibute:POINts? [<arb name>]

4 Query the number of points in the specified arbitrary waveform. Returns a
value from 1 to 8,192 points. The default arb name is the arbitrary
waveform currently active (selected with FUNC:USER command).

DATA:ATTRibute:PTPeak? [<arb name>]

Query the peak-to-peak value of all data points for the specified arbitrary
waveform. The default arb name is the arbitrary waveform currently
active (selected with FUNC:USER command).
• This command returns a value from “0” to “+1.0”, with “+1.0”

indicating full amplitude available.

of binary values between ±1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is
6.087 Vpp (into 50 ohms).

232


The function generator has five storage locations in non-volatile memory
to store instrument states. The locations are numbered 0 through 4.
The function generator automatically uses location “0” to hold the state
of the instrument at power down. You can also assign a user-defined
name to each of the locations (1 through 4) for use from the front panel.
*SAV {0|1|2|3|4}
Store (save) the current instrument state in the specified non-volatile
storage location. Any state previously stored in the same location will be
overwritten (and no error will be generated).
• You can store the instrument state in any of the five storage locations.
However, you can only recall a state from a location that contains a
previously-stored state.
• From the remote interface only, you can use storage location “0” to 4
store a fifth instrument state (you cannot store to this location from
the front panel). However, note that location “0” is automatically
• The state storage feature “remembers” the selected function

(including arbitrary waveforms), frequency, amplitude, dc offset,
duty cycle, symmetry, as well as any modulation parameters in use.
• If you delete an arbitrary waveform from non-volatile memory after

storing the instrument state, the waveform data is lost and the
function generator will not output the waveform when the state is
recalled. The built-in “exponential rise” waveform is output in place of
the deleted waveform.
233

• When power is turned off, the function generator automatically stores

its state in storage location “0”. You can configure the function
generator to automatically recall the power-down state when power
is restored. See the MEM:STAT:REC:AUTO command on page 236 for
more information.
• The front-panel display state (DISP command) is saved when you

store the instrument state. When you recall the instrument state,
the front-panel display will return to the previous state.
• An instrument reset (*RST command) does not affect the

configurations stored in memory. Once a state is stored, it remains
until it is overwritten or specifically deleted.
*RCL {0|1|2|3|4}
Recall the instrument state stored in the specified non-volatile storage
location. You cannot recall the instrument state from a storage location
that is empty.
4 • When shipped from the factory, storage locations “1” through “4” are
empty (location “0” has the power-on state).
• From the remote interface only, you can use location “0” to store a
fifth instrument state (you cannot store to this location from the
front panel). However, keep in mind that location “0” is automatically
234

MEMory:STATe:NAME {0|1|2|3|4} [,<name>]

MEMory:STATe:NAME? {0|1|2|3|4}
Assign a custom name to the specified storage location. You can name a
location from the front panel or over the remote interface, but you can
only recall a state by name from the front panel (the *RCL command
requires a numeric parameter). The :NAME? query returns a quoted
string containing the name currently assigned to the specified storage
location. If you have not assigned a user-defined name to the specified
location, the default name is returned (“AUTO_RECALL”, “STATE_1”,
“STATE_2”, “STATE_3”, or “STATE_4”).

be a letter (A-Z), but the remaining characters can be letters,
numbers (0-9), or the underscore character (“ _ ”). Blank spaces are
not allowed. An error is generated if you specify a name with more
than 12 characters. An example is shown below.
MEM:STATE:NAME 1,TEST_WFORM_1
• From the front panel, you cannot assign a custom name to storage
4
location “0”.
• If you do not specify a name (note that the name parameter is

optional), the default name is assigned to that state. This provides a
way to clear a name (however, the stored state is not deleted).
• The function generator will not prevent you from assigning the same
name to different storage locations. For example, you can assign the
same name to locations “1” and “2”.
MEMory:STATe:DELete {0|1|2|3|4}
Delete the contents of the specified storage location. If you have assigned
a user-defined name to a location (MEM:STAT:NAME command), this
command also removes the name that you assigned and restores the
default name (“AUTO_RECALL”, “STATE_1”, “STATE_2”, etc.). Note that
you cannot recall the instrument state from a storage location that is
empty. An error is generated if you attempt to recall a deleted state.
235

MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO {OFF|ON}
MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO?
Disable or enable the automatic recall of the power-down state from
storage location “0” when power is turned on. Select “ON” to automatically
recall the power-down state when power is turned on. Select “OFF”
(default) to issue a reset (*RST command) when power is turned on
(state “0” is not automatically recalled). The :AUTO? query returns
“0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
MEMory:STATe:VALid? {0|1|2|3|4}
Query the specified storage location to determine if a valid state is
currently stored in that location. You can use this command before
sending the *RCL command to determine if a state has been previously
stored in this location. Returns “0” if no state has been stored or if it has
been deleted. Returns “1” if a valid state is stored in the specified location.
MEMory:STATe:CATalog?
4 Returns the names assigned to storage locations 0 - 4. If no user-defined
names have been assigned, the query returns the factory defaults:
“AUTO_RECALL”,“STATE_1”,“STATE_2”,“STATE_3”,“STATE_4”,
This command returns the factory default name for location 0

(“AUTO_RECALL”) unless a new name has been defined. Although you
can define a name for location 0, the name is overwritten when the power
is cycled and a new power down state is stored in this location.
MEMory:NSTates?
Query the total number of memory locations available for state storage.
Always returns “5” (memory location “0” is included).
236

See also “System-Related Operations” starting on page 119 in chapter 3.
SYSTem:ERRor?
Read and clear one error from the function generator’s error queue.
A record of up to 20 command syntax or hardware errors can be stored in
the error queue. See chapter 5 for a complete listing of the error messages.

read them. The function generator beeps once each time an error is
generated (unless disabled using the SYST:BEEP:STAT command).
No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the
queue. If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue, 4

the queue. The error queue is not cleared by a reset (*RST command).
• Errors have the following format (the error string may contain up to
255 characters).
237

*IDN?
Read the function generator’s identification string which contains four
fields separated by commas. The first field is the manufacturer’s name,
the second field is the model number, the third field is the serial number,
and the fourth field is a revision code which contains four numbers
separated by dashes.
• The command returns a string with the following format (be sure to
dimension a string variable with at least 50 characters).
Agilent Technologies,33210A,<serial number>,f.ff-b.bb-aa-p
f.ff = Firmware revision number

b.bb = Boot kernel revision number
aa = ASIC revision number
p = Printed circuit board revision number
4 DISPlay {OFF|ON}
DISPlay?
Disable or enable the function generator front-panel display. When it is
disabled, the front-panel display is blanked (however, the bulb used to
backlight the display remains enabled). The DISP? query returns “0”
(OFF) or “1” (ON).
• With the front-panel display disabled, there will be some improvement

in command execution speed from the remote interface.
• Sending a message to the front-panel display from the remote interface

(DISP:TEXT command) overrides the display state. This means that
you can display a message even if the display is disabled (remote
interface errors are always displayed even if the display is disabled).
• The display is automatically enabled when power is cycled, after an

instrument reset (*RST command), or when you return to local
(front panel) operation. Press the key or execute the IEEE-488
GTL (Go To Local) command from the remote interface to return to
the local state.
• The display state is saved when you store the instrument state using
*SAV command. When you recall the instrument state using *RCL
command, the front-panel display will return to the previous state.
238

DISPlay:TEXT <quoted string>

DISPlay:TEXT?
Display a text message on the function generator’s front-panel display.
Sending a text message to the display overrides the display state as set
by the DISP command. The :TEXT? query reads the message sent to the
front-panel display and returns a quoted string.
• You can use upper- or lower-case letters (A-Z), numbers (0-9), and any
other character on a standard computer keyboard. Depending on the
number of characters you specify in the string, the function generator
will choose one of two font sizes to display the message. You can
display approximately 12 characters in a large font and approximately
40 characters in a small font. An example is shown below.
DISP:TEXT 'Test in Progress...'
• While a message is displayed, information relating to the output

waveform, such as frequency and amplitude, is not sent to the front-
panel display. 4
DISPlay:TEXT:CLEar
Clear the text message currently shown on the function generator’s
front-panel display.
• If the display is currently enabled (DISP ON command), the

DISP:TEXT:CLEAR command will return the normal front-panel
display mode.
• If the display is currently disabled (DISP OFF command), the

DISP:TEXT:CLEAR command will clear the message but the display
will remain disabled. To enable the display, send the DISP ON
command, press the key, or send the GTL (Go To Local)
command for GPIB or USB. (For LAN you can send the
SYST:COMM:RLST LOC command.)
*RST
Reset the function generator to its factory default state, independent of
the MEM:STAT:REC:AUTO command setting. However, *RST does not
affect stored instrument states, stored arbitrary waveforms, or the I/O
settings, which are stored in non-volatile memory. This command will
abort a sweep or burst in progress and will re-enable the front-panel
display if it was previously disabled (DISP OFF command).
239

*TST?
Perform a complete self-test of the function generator. Returns “+0”
(PASS) or “+1” (FAIL). If the test fails, one or more error messages
will be generated to provide additional information on the failure.
Use the SYST:ERR? command to read the error queue (see page 237).
SYSTem:VERSion?
Query the function generator to determine the present SCPI version.
Returns a string in the form “YYYY.V”, where “YYYY” represents the
year of the version, and “V” represents a version number for that year
(e.g., 1999.0).
SYSTem:BEEPer
Issue a single beep immediately.
SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe {OFF|ON}
SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe?
4 Disable or enable the tone heard when an error is generated from the
front-panel or over the remote interface. The current selection is stored
in non-volatile memory. The :STAT? query returns “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
SYSTem:KLOCk[:STATe] {OFF|ON}
Set front panel keyboard lock OFF (the default) or ON. With :KLOC ON,
the front panel keyboard is locked, including the key unless it has
been excluded. To lock the keyboard without locking the key, send
SYST:KLOC:EXCL LOC first, before SYST:KLOC ON.
SYSTem:KLOCk:EXCLude {NONE|LOCal}
SYSTem:KLOCk:EXCLude?
• Setting :EXCL NONE (the default) sets no exclusion, and

SYST:KLOC ON locks the entire keyboard including the key.
• Setting :EXCL LOC excludes the key, and SYST:KLOC ON locks

the keyboard, except the key.
240

SYSTem:SECurity:IMMediate
Clears all instrument memory except for the boot parameters and
calibration constants. Initializes all instrument settings to their *RST
values. Destroys all user-defined state information, user-defined
arbitrary waveforms, and user-defined I/O settings such as the IP
address. This command is typically used to clear all memory before
removing the instrument from a secure area. This command is not
recommended for use in routine applications because of the
possibility of unintended loss of data.
*LRN?
Query the function generator and return a string of SCPI commands
containing the current settings (learn string). You can then send the
string back to the instrument to restore this state at a later time.
For proper operation, do not modify the returned string before sending
it to the function generator. The returned string will contain about
1,500 characters. To avoid possible instrument errors, execute the *RST
command first, before sending the learn string to the instrument.
4
*OPC
Set the “Operation Complete” bit (bit 0) in the Standard Event register
after all of the previous commands have been completed. Other
commands may be executed before the bit is set. This command is used
in the triggered sweep or triggered burst modes to provide a way to poll
or interrupt the computer when the *TRG command is complete.
*OPC?
Return “1” to the output buffer after the previous commands have been
completed. Other commands cannot be executed until this one completes.
*OPT?
Query whether optional arbitrary waveforms are currently enabled.
Returns “002” if arbitrary waveforms are enabled. Returns “0” if
arbitrary waveforms are not enabled.
Note: To upgrade your 33210A to include arbitrary waveform

functionality (Option 002), go to www.agilent.com/find/33210U.
*WAI
Wait for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional
commands over the interface.
241


See also “Remote Interface Configuration” on page 128 in chapter 3.
Remote/Local Instrument State Commands: The following

commands set the remote/local state of the function generator over the
LAN interface from a Telnet or socket session. These commands provide
control analogous to the IEEE-488.2 commands such as GTL (Go To
Local) over the GPIB and USB interfaces.
SYSTem:LOCal
Sets the instrument state to local (the normal power-on default state).
Removes any annunciator and unlocks the front panel keyboard.
SYSTem:REMote
Sets the instrument state to remote. Displays the remote annunciator
and locks the keyboard (except the key).
4
SYSTem:RWLock
Sets the instrument state to remote with lock. Displays the rwl
annunciator and locks the keyboard (including the key).
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RLSTate {LOCal|REMote|RWLock}
This command performs the same functions as the previous three
separate commands.
• LOCal - (The default). Sets the instrument state to local. Removes

any annunciator and unlocks the front panel keyboard.
• REMote - Sets the instrument state to remote. Displays the remote

annunciator and locks the keyboard (except the key).
• RWLock - Sets the instrument state to remote with lock. Displays the
rwl annunciator and locks the keyboard (including the key).
GPIB Interface Commands:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess < address>

SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess?
Sets the GPIB (IEEE-488) address for the 33210A. The GPIB address
can take any value between 0 and 30. The factory default is 10.
242

LAN Interface Commands:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:AUTOip[:STATe] {OFF|0|ON|1}
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:AUTOip[:STATe]?
Disables or enables use of the Auto-IP standard to automatically assign
an IP address to the 33210A. The factory setting is enabled (ON). The
query returns “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
• If you change the Auto-IP setting, you must cycle power on the
instrument to activate the new setting.
• Auto-IP allocates IP addresses from the link-local address range

(169.254.xxx.xxx).
• The Auto-IP setting is stored in non-volatile memory, and does not

change when power has been off, or after an instrument reset (*RST).
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress < address>

SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress?
Assigns a static Internet Protocol (IP) address for the 33210A, which is
4
used if DHCP or Auto-IP cannot assign an IP address. The factory
setting is “169.254.2.20”. See your network administrator for a valid IP
address to use. The query returns the current static IP address.
• If you change the IP address setting, you must cycle power on the
• The IP address is stored in non-volatile memory, and does not change

when power has been off, or after an instrument reset (*RST).
243

More About Dot Notation: Dot-notation addresses ("nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn"

where "nnn" is a byte value) must be expressed with care, as most web
software on the PC will interpret byte values with leading zeros as octal
numbers. For example, "255.255.020.011" is actually equivalent to decimal
"255.255.16.9" not "255.255.20.11" because ".020" is interpreted as "16"
expressed in octal, and ".011" as "9". To avoid confusion, use only decimal
expressions of byte values (0 to 255), with no leading zeros.
For example, the 33210A assumes that all dot-notation addresses are
expressed as decimal byte values and strips all leading zeros from these
byte values. Thus, attempting to set an IP address of "255.255.020.011" will
become "255.255.20.11" (a purely decimal expression). Be sure to enter the
exact expression, "255.255.20.11", in your PC web software to address the
instrument. Do not use "255.255.020.011" –the PC will interpret this address
differently due to the leading zeros.
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:LIPaddress?
Returns the “last valid Auto IP address used” in dot notation (for
4 example: “169.254.20.11”).
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MAC?
Returns the 33210A’s Media Access Control (MAC) address. This is an
unchangeable 48-bit address assigned by the manufacturer to each
unique internet device. The MAC address is represented as 12
hexadecimal characters in the form “XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX” (for
example, “00-30-D3-00-10-41”).
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MEDiasense {OFF|0|ON|1}
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MEDiasense?
Disables or enables the MEDiasense feature. When enabled, this feature
detects a loss of LAN connectivity greater than 20 seconds, and then, on
sensing a reconnection, re-starts the LAN. The factory setting is enabled
(ON). The query returns “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
• If you change the MEDiasense setting, you must cycle power on the
• The MEDiasense setting is stored in non-volatile memory, and does

not change when power has been off, or after an instrument reset
(*RST).
244

SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:NETBios {OFF|0|ON|1}
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:NETBios?
Disables or enables the use of NETBios to automatically assign an IP
address to the 33210A for peer-to-peer naming on a private network that
uses the NETBios naming service. The factory setting is enabled (ON).
The query returns “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
• If you change the NETBios setting, you must cycle power on the
• The NETBios setting is stored in non-volatile memory, and does not

SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TELNet:PROMpt <string>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TELNet:PROMpt?
Sets the command prompt seen when using a Telnet session to
communicate with the 33210A. The default prompt is “33210A>”.
• The 33210A uses LAN port 5024 for Telnet sessions. 4

• Telnet session can typically be started as follows from a host
computer shell:
telnet <IP_address> <port>
For example:
telnet 169.254.2.20 5024
To exit a Telnet session, press <Cntr-D>.
• The prompt is a quoted string of up to 15 characters.
• The command prompt is stored in non-volatile memory, and does not

245

SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TELNet:WMESsage <string>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TELNet:WMESsage?
Sets the welcome message seen when using a Telnet session to
communicate with the 33210A. The default welcome message is
“Welcome to Agilent’s 33210A Waveform Generator”.
• The 33210A uses LAN port 5024 for Telnet sessions.
• The message is a quoted string of up to 63 characters.
• The welcome message is stored in non-volatile memory, and does not

LAN Port Usage The Agilent 33210A uses LAN port 5024 for Telnet
sessions, but uses LAN port 5025 for Socket sessions. For further
information on socket sessions, see the white paper “Socket Connections
for LAN-enabled Instruments” found on the Agilent 33210A Product
Reference CD.
4
246

Phase-Lock Commands (Option 001 Only)

The rear-panel 10 MHz In and 10 MHz Out connectors (present only if
Option 001 is installed) allow synchronization between multiple Agilent
33210A function generators (see connection diagram below) or to an
external 10 MHz clock signal. You can also control the phase offset from
the front panel or over the remote interface.
Note: You can use the phase lock commands described below to
synchronize multiple 33210A instruments only if all of these instruments
have Option 001, External Timebase Reference, installed. This option
provides the “10 MHz Out” and “10 MHz In” back panel connectors and
the circuitry required to synchronize the instruments.
See “External Timebase Reference (Option 001)” on page 137 for
additional information on using these features.
Adjust the phase offset of the output waveform in degrees or radians as

specified by the previous UNIT:ANGL command (not available for pulse
and noise). Select from -360 degrees to +360 degrees or -2π to +2π radians.
The default is 0 degrees (0 radians). MIN = -360 degrees (-2π radians).
MAX = +360 degrees (+2π radians). The PHAS? query returns the phase
offset in degrees or radians.
247

• The specified phase adjustment causes a “bump” or “hop” in the

output waveform in order to change the phase relationship to the
external signal to which it is currently locked.
• This phase adjustment for phase-lock applications is independent of

the burst phase as set by the BURS:PHAS command (see page 215).
UNIT:ANGLe?
Select degrees or radians to set the phase offset value using the
PHAS command (remote interface only). The default is DEG. The :ANGL?
query returns “DEG” or “RAD”.
• From the front panel, the phase offset is always displayed in degrees
(radians are not available). If you set the phase offset in radians from
the remote interface and then return to front-panel operation, you will
see that the function generator converts the phase offset to degrees.
4 PHASe:REFerence
Immediately sets a new zero-phase reference point without changing the
output of the function generator. That is, this command resets the phase
value returned by the PHAS? command but does not affect the output
waveform. It is equivalent to the Set 0 Phase softkey in the front panel
“Utility” menu. See “External Timebase Reference (Option 001)” on
page 137 for further information. This command does not have a query
form.
PHASe:UNLock:ERRor:STATe {OFF|ON}
PHASe:UNLock:ERRor:STATe?
Disable or enable the function generator from generating an error if
the phase-lock is ever lost. The default is OFF. If the phase-lock is lost
and the error is enabled, a “Reference phase-locked loop is unlocked”
error is generated. The unlock error setting is not stored in non-volatile
memory. That is, the setting will be lost when the power is cycled. The
:STAT? query returns “0” (OFF) or “1” (ON).
248

The SCPI Status System

This section describes the structure of the SCPI status system used by
the function generator. The status system records various conditions and
states of the instrument in several register groups as shown on the
following page. Each of the register groups is made up of several low-
level registers called Condition registers, Event registers, and Enable
registers which control the action of specific bits within the register group.
What is a Condition Register?

A condition register continuously monitors the state of the instrument.
The bits in the condition register are updated in real time and the bits
are not latched or buffered. This is a read-only register and bits are not
cleared when you read the register. A query of a condition register
returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary-weighted sum
of all bits set in that register.
4
What is an Event Register?
An event register latches the various events from changes in the condition
register. There is no buffering in this register; while an event bit is set,
subsequent events corresponding to that bit are ignored. This is a read-
only register. Once a bit is set, it remains set until cleared by query
command (such as STAT:QUES:EVEN?) or a *CLS (clear status) command.
A query of this register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the
binary-weighted sum of all bits set in that register.
What is an Enable Register?

An enable register defines which bits in the event register will be
reported to the Status Byte register group. You can write to or read
from an enable register. A *CLS (clear status) command will not clear
the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register.
A STAT:PRES command clears all bits in the enable register. To enable
bits in the enable register to be reported to the Status Byte register,
you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the binary-
weighted sum of the corresponding bits.
249

Agilent 33210A Status System
Questionable Data Register NOTES:

C = Condition Register
C EV EN EV = Event Register
Volt Ovld EN = Enable Register
Ovld = Overload
Loop Unlock
“OR”
Cal Error
External Ref
Error Queue
STAT:QUES:COND?
4 STAT:QUES:EVEN?
STAT:QUES:ENAB <value>
STAT:QUES:ENAB?
Status Byte Register
SYST:ERR?
Output Buffer C EN
“OR”
Serial Poll *SRE < value>

*STB? *SRE?
Summary Bit (RQS)
Standard Event Register
EV EN
Operation Complete
Query Error
Device Error
Execution Error “OR”
Command Error
Power On
*ESR? *ESE <value>
*ESE?
250

The Status Byte Register

The Status Byte summary register reports conditions from the other
status registers. Data that is waiting in the function generator’s output
buffer is immediately reported on the “Message Available” bit (bit 4).
Clearing an event register from one of the other register groups will clear
the corresponding bits in the Status Byte condition register. Reading all
messages from the output buffer, including any pending queries, will
clear the “Message Available” bit. To set the enable register mask and
generate an SRQ (service request), you must write a decimal value to the
register using the *SRE command.
Bit Definitions – Status Byte Register
Decimal
Bit Number Value Definition
0 Not Used 1 Not Used. Returns “0”.

1
2
Not Used
Error Queue
2
4
Not Used. Returns “0”.
One or more errors are stored in the 4
Error Queue.
3 Questionable Data 8 One or more bits are set in the Questionable
Data Register (bits must be enabled).
4 Message Available 16 Data is available in the instrument’s output buffer.
5 Standard Event 32 One or more bits are set in the Standard Event
Register (bits must be enabled).
6 Master Summary 64 One or more bits are set in the Status Byte
Register (bits must be enabled).
251

The Status Byte condition register is cleared when:
• You execute the *CLS (clear status) command.
• You read the event register from one of the other register groups
(only the corresponding bits are cleared in the condition register).
The Status Byte enable register is cleared when:
• You execute the *SRE 0 command.
• You turn the power on and have previously configured the function
generator to clear the enable register using the *PSC 1 command.
Note that the enable register will not be cleared at power-on if you
have configured the function generator using the *PSC 0 command.
252

Using Service Request (SRQ) and Serial Poll

You must configure your computer to respond to the IEEE-488 service
request (SRQ) interrupt to use this capability. Use the Status Byte
enable register (*SRE command) to select which condition bits will assert
the IEEE-488 SRQ line. If bit 6 (RQS) transitions from a “0” to a “1”,
then an IEEE-488 service request message is sent to your computer.
The computer may then poll the instruments on the interface bus to
identify which one is asserting the service request line (that is, the
instrument with bit 6 set in its Serial Poll response).
When a Serial Poll is issued, bit 6 (RQS) is cleared in the Serial Poll
response (no other bits are affected) and the service request line is
cleared. The “Master Summary Bit” in the *STB? response is not cleared.
To obtain the Serial Poll response, send an IEEE-488 Serial Poll message.
The instrument sends a one-byte binary response. Performing a Serial
Poll is handled automatically by the IEEE-488 bus interface hardware.
4
Unlike ASCII commands, and some other GPIB commands, a Serial

Poll is executed immediately and does not involve the instrument’s main
processor. Therefore, the status indicated by a Serial Poll may not
necessarily indicate the effect of the most recent command. Use the
*OPC? command to guarantee that commands previously sent to the
instrument have completed before executing a Serial Poll.
Using *STB? to Read the Status Byte

The *STB? command is similar to a Serial Poll but it is processed like
any other ASCII instrument command. The *STB? command returns the
same result as a Serial Poll but bit 6 is not cleared as long as the enabled
conditions remain.
The *STB? command is not handled automatically by the IEEE-488 bus
interface hardware and will be executed only after previous commands
have completed. You cannot clear an SRQ using the *STB? command.
253

Using the Message Available Bit (MAV)

You can use the Status Byte “Message Available” bit (bit 4) to determine
when data is available to read into your computer. The instrument
subsequently clears bit 4 only after all messages have been read from the
output buffer.
To Interrupt Your Computer Using SRQ

1. Send a Device Clear message to return the function generator to a
responsive state and clear it’s output buffer (e.g., CLEAR 710).
2. Clear the event registers and error queue using the *CLS command.
3. Set up the enable register masks. Use the *ESE command to

configure the Standard Event enable register and the *SRE command
to configure the Status Byte enable register.
4. Send the *OPC? command and read the result to ensure synchronization.
4 5. Enable your computer’s IEEE-488 SRQ interrupt.
To Determine When a Command Sequence is Completed

1. Send a Device Clear message to return the function generator to a
responsive state and clear it’s output buffer (e.g., CLEAR 710).
2. Clear the event registers and error queue using the *CLS command.
3. Enable the “Operation Complete” bit (bit 0) in the Standard Event

register by executing the *ESE 1 command.
4. Send the *OPC? command and read the result to ensure synchronization.
5. Execute your command string to program the desired configuration,

and then execute the *OPC command as the last command. When the
command sequence is completed, the “Operation Complete” bit (bit 0)
is set in the Standard Event register.
6. Use a Serial Poll to check to see when bit 5 (routed from the Standard
Event register) is set in the Status Byte condition register. You could
also configure the function generator for an SRQ interrupt by sending
*SRE 32 (Status Byte enable register, bit 5).
254

The Questionable Data Register

The Questionable Data register group provides information about the
quality or integrity of the function generator. Any or all of these conditions
can be reported to the Questionable Data summary bit through the
enable register. To set the enable register mask, you must write a
decimal value to the register using the STAT:QUES:ENABle command.
Bit Definitions – Questionable Data Register
Decimal
0 Voltage Overload 1 Voltage overload on OUTPUT connector.

The Output has been disabled.
4 Not Used 16 Not Used. Returns “0”
5 Loop Unlocked 32 Function generator has lost phase lock.
Frequency accuracy will be affected.
4
8 Calibration Error 256 Error occurred during cal, or cal memory
lost, or calibration is unsecured.
9 External Reference 512 External timebase is being used.
255

The Questionable Data event register is cleared when:
• You execute the *CLS (clear status) command.
• You query the event register using the STAT:QUES:EVEN? command.
The Questionable Data enable register is cleared when:
• You turn on the power (the *PSC command does not apply).
• You execute the STAT:PRES command.
• You execute the STAT:QUES:ENAB 0 command.
256

The Standard Event Register

The Standard Event register group reports the following types of events:
power-on detected, command syntax errors, command execution errors,
self-test or calibration errors, query errors, or the *OPC command has
been executed. Any or all of these conditions can be reported to the
Standard Event summary bit through the enable register. To set the
enable register mask, you must write a decimal value to the register
using the *ESE command.
Bit Definitions – Standard Event Register
Decimal
0 Operation Complete 1 All commands prior to and including *OPC

have completed and the overlapped command
(e.g., *TRG for burst) has completed.
2 Query Error 4 The instrument tried to read the output buffer
but it was empty. Or, a new command line
4
was received before a previous query has
been read. Or, both the input and output
buffers are full.
3 Device Error 8 A self-test, cal, or other device-specific error
has occurred (see chapter 5).
4 Execution Error 16 An execution error has occurred
(see chapter 5).
5 Command Error 32 A command syntax error has occurred
(see chapter 5).
7 Power On 128 Power has been cycled on since the last time
the event register was read or cleared.
257

The Standard event register is cleared when:
• You execute the *CLS command.
• You query the event register using the *ESR? command.
The Standard Event enable register is cleared when:
• You execute the *ESE 0 command.
• You turn the power on and have previously configured the function
generator to clear the enable register using the *PSC 1 command.
Note that the enable register will not be cleared at power-on if you
have configured the function generator using the *PSC 0 command.
258


Use the following commands to access the Status System Registers.
Status Byte Register Commands
See the table on page 251 for the register bit definitions.
*STB?
Query the summary (condition) register in this register group.
This command is similar to a Serial Poll but it is processed like any other
instrument command. This command returns the same result as a
Serial Poll but the “Master Summary” bit (bit 6) is not cleared by the
*STB? command.
4
*SRE <enable value>
*SRE?
Enable bits in the Status Byte to generate a Service Request. To enable
specific bits, you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the
binary-weighted sum of the bits in the register. The selected bits are
summarized in the “Master Summary” bit (bit 6) of the Status Byte
Register. If any of the selected bits change from “0” to “1”, a Service
Request signal is generated. The *SRE? query returns a decimal value
which corresponds to the binary-weighted sum of all bits enabled by the
*SRE command.
• A *CLS (clear status) does not clear the enable register but it does
clear all bits in the event register.
• A STATus:PRESet does not clear the bits in the Status Byte

enable register.
• A *PSC 0 preserves the contents of the enable register through

power cycles.
259

Questionable Data Register Commands
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
Query the condition register in this group. This is a read-only register
and bits are not cleared when you read the register. A query of this
register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary-
weighted sum of all bits set in the register.
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
Query the event register in this register group. This is a read-only register.
Once a bit is set, it remains set until cleared by this command or *CLS
(clear status) command. A query of this register returns a decimal value
which corresponds to the binary-weighted sum of all bits set in the register.
4 STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <enable value>
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?
Enable bits in the enable register in this register group. The selected bits
are then reported to the Status Byte. A *CLS (clear status) will not clear
the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register.
The STATus:PRESet command clears all bits in the enable register.
To enable bits in the enable register, you must write a decimal value
which corresponds to the binary-weighted sum of the bits you wish to
enable in the register.
The :ENAB? query returns a decimal value which corresponds to the

binary-weighted sum of all bits enabled by the STAT:QUES:ENAB
command.
260

Standard Event Register Commands
*ESR?
Query the Standard Event Status Register. Once a bit is set, it remains
set until cleared by a *CLS (clear status) command or queried by this
command. A query of this register returns a decimal value which
corresponds to the binary-weighted sum of all bits set in the register.
*ESE <enable value>

*ESE?
Enable bits in the Standard Event Status Register to be reported in the
Status Byte. The selected bits are summarized in the “Standard Event” bit
(bit 5) of the Status Byte Register. The *ESE? query returns a decimal
value which corresponds to the binary-weighted sum of all bits enabled
by the *ESE command.
4
• A *CLS (clear status) does not clear the enable register but it does
clear all bits in the event register.
• A STATus:PRESet does not clear the bits in the Status Byte

enable register.
• A *PSC 0 preserves the contents of the enable register through

power cycles.
261

Miscellaneous Status Register Commands
*CLS
Clear the event register in all register groups. This command also clears
the error queue and cancels a *OPC operation.
STATus:PRESet
Clear all bits in the Questionable Data enable register and the Standard
Operation enable register.
*PSC {0|1}
*PSC?
Power-On Status Clear. Clear the Standard Event enable register and
Status Byte condition register at power on (*PSC 1). When *PSC 0 is
in effect, these two registers are not cleared at power on. The default is
4 *PSC 1. The *PSC? query returns the power-on status clear setting.
Returns “0” (do not clear at power on) or “1” (clear at power on).
*OPC
Set the “Operation Complete” bit (bit 0) in the Standard Event register
after the previous commands have completed. When used with a bus-
triggered sweep or burst, you may have the opportunity to execute
commands after the *OPC command and before the “Operation Complete”
bit is set in the register.
262

For an overview of the calibration features of the function generator,
refer to “Calibration Overview” in chapter 3 starting on page 139.
For a detailed discussion of the function generator’s calibration
procedures, refer to chapter 4 in the Agilent 33210A Service Guide.
CAL:SECure:STATe {OFF|ON},<code>
CAL:SECure:STATe?
Unsecure or secure the instrument for calibration. The calibration code
may contain up to 12 characters. The :STAT? query returns “0” (OFF) or
“1” (ON).
CAL:SETup <0|1|2|3| . . . |75>

CAL:SETup?
Configure the function generator’s internal state for each of the
calibration steps to be performed. The :SET? query reads the calibration
4
setup number and returns a value from “0” to “75”.
CAL:VALue <value>
CAL:VALue?
Specify the value of the known calibration signal as outlined in the
calibration procedures in the Agilent 33210A Service Guide. Use the
CAL:SET command to configure the function generator’s internal state
for each of the calibration steps to be performed. The :VAL? query
returns a number in the form “+1.0000000000000E+01”.
CAL?
Perform a calibration of the instrument using the specified calibration
value (CAL:VAL command). Before you can calibrate the function
generator, you must unsecure it by entering the correct security code.
Returns “0” (PASS) or “1” (FAIL).
263

CAL:SECure:CODE <new code>

Enter a new security code. To change the security code, you must first
unsecure the function generator using the old security code, and then
enter a new code. The security code is stored in non-volatile memory.
• The calibration code may contain up to 12 characters. The first

character must be a letter (A-Z), but the remaining characters can
be letters, numbers (0-9), or the underscore character (“ _ ”). You do
not have to use all 12 characters, but the first character must always
be a letter.
CAL:COUNt?
Query the instrument to determine the number of times it has been
calibrated. Note that your instrument was calibrated before it left the
factory. When you receive your instrument from the factory, be sure to
read the count to determine its initial value.
• The calibration count is stored in non-volatile memory. The count

4 increments up to a maximum of “65,535” after which it rolls over
to “0”. Since the value increments by one for each calibration point,
a complete calibration may increase the value by many counts.
CAL:STRing <quoted string>

CAL:STRing?
Store a message in non-volatile calibration memory. Storing a message
will overwrite any message previously stored in memory. The :STR?
query reads the calibration message and returns a quoted string.
• The calibration message may contain up to 40 characters (additional

characters are truncated). An example is shown below.
CAL:STR 'Cal Due: 01 June 2009'
• You can record a calibration message only from the remote interface
and only when the instrument is unsecured. You can read the
message either from the front panel or over the remote interface.
You can read the calibration message whether the instrument is
secured or unsecured.
264

An Introduction to the SCPI Language

SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) is an
ASCII-based instrument command language designed for test and
measurement instruments. Refer to “Simplified Programming Overview”
starting on page 160, for an introduction to the basic techniques used to
program the function generator over the remote interface.
SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure, also known as a
tree system. In this system, associated commands are grouped together
under a common node or root, thus forming subsystems. A portion of the
SOURce subsystem is shown below to illustrate the tree system.
SOURce:
FREQuency
:STARt {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:STARt? [MINimum|MAXimum]
4
FREQuency
:STOP {<frequency>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:STOP? [MINimum|MAXimum]
SWEep
:SPACing {LINear|LOGarithmic}
:SPACing?
SWEep
:TIME {<seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum}
:TIME? [MINimum|MAXimum]
SWEep
:STATe {OFF|ON}
:STATe?
SOURce is the root keyword of the command, FREQuency and SWEep are
second-level keywords, and STARt and STOP are third-level keywords.
A colon ( : ) separates a command keyword from a lower-level keyword.
265

Command Format Used in This Manual

The format used to show commands in this manual is illustrated below:
The command syntax shows most commands (and some parameters) as
a mixture of upper- and lower-case letters. The upper-case letters
indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command. For shorter program
lines, you can send the abbreviated form. For better program readability,
you can send the long form.
For example, in the above syntax statement, FREQ and FREQUENCY are
both acceptable forms. You can use upper- or lower-case letters.
Therefore, FREQUENCY, freq, and Freq are all acceptable. Other forms,
such as FRE and FREQUEN, will generate an error.
• Braces ( { } ) enclose the parameter choices for a given command string.

The braces are not sent with the command string.
• A vertical bar ( | ) separates multiple parameter choices for a given

4 command string.
• Triangle brackets ( < > ) indicate that you must specify a value for the
enclosed parameter. For example, the above syntax statement shows
the frequency parameter enclosed in triangle brackets. The brackets
are not sent with the command string. You must specify a value for
the parameter (such as "FREQ 5000").
• Some parameters are enclosed in square brackets ( [ ] ). The square

brackets indicate that the parameter is optional and can be omitted.
The brackets are not sent with the command string. If you do not
specify a value for an optional parameter, the function generator
chooses a default value.
266

Command Separators
A colon ( : ) is used to separate a command keyword from a lower-level
keyword. You must insert a blank space to separate a parameter from a
command keyword. If a command requires more than one parameter,
you must separate adjacent parameters using a comma as shown below:
"APPL:SIN 5 KHZ, 3.0 VPP, -2.5 V"
A semicolon ( ; ) is used to separate commands within the same
subsystem, and can also minimize typing. For example, sending the
following command string:
"FREQ:START 10; STOP 1000"
... is the same as sending the following two commands:
"FREQ:START 10"
"FREQ:STOP 1000"
Use a colon and a semicolon to link commands from different subsystems.
For example, in the following command string, an error is generated if
you do not use both the colon and semicolon:
4
"SWE:STAT ON;:TRIG:SOUR EXT"
Using the MIN and MAX Parameters

You can substitute “MINimum” or “MAXimum” in place of a parameter
for many commands. For example, consider the following command:
Instead of selecting a specific frequency, you can substitute MIN to set
the frequency to its minimum value or MAX to set the frequency to its
maximum value.
267

Querying Parameter Settings

You can query the current value of most parameters by adding a
question mark (“?”) to the command. For example, the following
command sets the output frequency to 5 kHz:
"FREQ 5000"
You can then query the frequency value by executing:
"FREQ?"
You can also query the minimum or maximum frequency allowed with
the present function as follows:
"FREQ? MIN"
"FREQ? MAX"
SCPI Command Terminators

A command string sent to the function generator must terminate with a
4 <new line> character. The IEEE-488 EOI (End-Or-Identify) message is
interpreted as a <new line> character and can be used to terminate a
command string in place of a <new line> character. A <carriage return>
followed by a <new line> is also accepted. Command string termination
will always reset the current SCPI command path to the root level.
IEEE-488.2 Common Commands

The IEEE-488.2 standard defines a set of common commands that
perform functions such as reset, self-test, and status operations.
Common commands always begin with an asterisk ( * ), are three
characters in length, and may include one or more parameters.
The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a
blank space. Use a semicolon ( ; ) to separate multiple commands as
shown below:
"*RST; *CLS; *ESE 32; *OPC?"
268

SCPI Parameter Types

The SCPI language defines several different data formats to be used in
program messages and response messages.
Numeric Parameters Commands that require numeric parameters

will accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers
including optional signs, decimal points, and scientific notation. Special
values for numeric parameters like MINimum, MAXimum, and DEFault
are also accepted. You can also send engineering unit suffixes with
numeric parameters (e.g., Mhz or Khz). If only specific numeric values
are accepted, the function generator will automatically round the input
numeric parameters. The following command uses a numeric parameter:
Discrete Parameters Discrete parameters are used to program

settings that have a limited number of values (like BUS or IMMediate).
They have a short form and a long form just like command keywords.
You can mix upper- and lower-case letters. Query responses will always
return the short form in all upper-case letters. The following command
4
uses discrete parameters:
Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent a single binary

condition that is either true or false. For a false condition, the function
generator will accept “OFF” or “0”. For a true condition, the function
generator will accept “ON” or “1”. When you query a boolean setting,
the instrument will always return “0” or “1”. The following command
uses a boolean parameter:
AM:STATe {OFF|ON}
String Parameters String parameters can contain virtually any set of

ASCII characters. A string must begin and end with matching quotes;
either with a single quote or a double quote. You can include the quote
delimiter as part of the string by typing it twice without any characters
in between. The following command uses a string parameter:
DISPlay:TEXT <quoted string>
269

Using Device Clear
Using Device Clear

Device Clear is an IEEE-488 low-level bus message that you can use to
return the function generator to a responsive state. Different programming
languages and IEEE-488 interface cards provide access to this capability
through their own unique commands. The status registers, the error
queue, and all configuration states are left unchanged when a Device
Clear message is received. Device Clear performs the following actions.
• The function generator’s input and output buffers are cleared.
• The function generator is prepared to accept a new command string.
• An overlapped command, if any, will be terminated with no

“Operation Complete” indication (applies to the *TRG command).
Any sweep or burst in progress will be aborted immediately.
270
Error Messages
Error Messages

read them. The function generator beeps once each time an error
is generated (unless you have disabled the beeper).
No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the
queue. If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue,

the error queue. The error queue is not cleared by an instrument reset
(*RST command).
• Front-Panel Operation: Press and then select the topic entitled

“View the remote command error queue” (topic number 2). Then press
the SELECT softkey to view the errors in the error queue. As shown
below, the first error in the list (i.e., the error at the top of the list) is
the first error that was generated.
5
SYSTem:ERRor? Reads one error from the error queue
Errors have the following format (the error string may contain up to
255 characters).
Note: Some error numbers can have several causes. The descriptive
string begins with a fixed portion that is common to all errors with the
same number. In many cases, additional, situation-dependent
information appears after a semicolon (“;”). For example, there are several
causes for error -221. Here is an example:
-221,"Settings conflict; burst count reduced"
272
Chapter 5 Error Messages

Command Errors
Command Errors
-101 Invalid character

An invalid character was found in the command string. You may have
used an invalid character such as #, $, or % in the command header or
within a parameter. Example: TRIG:SOUR BUS# 4
-102 Syntax error
Invalid syntax was found in the command string. You may have
inserted a blank space before or after a colon in the command header,
or before a comma. Example: APPL:SIN ,1
-103 Invalid separator

An invalid separator was found in the command string. You may have
used a comma instead of a colon, semicolon, or blank space – or you may
have used a blank space instead of a comma. Examples: TRIG:SOUR,BUS
or APPL:SIN 1 1000
-105 GET not allowed

A Group Execute Trigger (GET) is not allowed within a command string.
-108 Parameter not allowed

More parameters were received than were expected for the command. 5
You may have entered an extra parameter or added a parameter to a
command that does not require a parameter. Example: APPL? 10
-109 Missing parameter

Fewer parameters were received than were expected for this command.
You have omitted one or more parameters that are required for this
command. Example: OUTP:LOAD
273

Command Errors
-112 Program mnemonic too long

A command header was received which contained more than the maximum
12 characters allowed. This error is also reported when a character-type
parameter is too long. Example: OUTP:SYNCHRONIZATION ON
-113 Undefined header

A command was received that is not valid for this instrument. You may
have misspelled the command or it may not be a valid command. If you
are using the short form of the command, make sure that it is correctly
abbreviated. Example: TRIGG:SOUR BUS
-123 Exponent too large

A numeric parameter was found whose exponent was larger than 32,759.
Example: BURS:NCYCL 1E34000
-124 Too many digits

A numeric parameter was found whose mantissa contained more than
255 digits, excluding leading zeros.
-128 Numeric data not allowed

A numeric parameter was received but a character string was expected.
Example: DISP:TEXT 123
-131 Invalid suffix

5 A suffix was incorrectly specified for a numeric parameter. You may have
misspelled the suffix. Example: SWE:TIME 0.5 SECS
-138 Suffix not allowed

A suffix is not supported for this command. Example: BURS:NCYC 12 CYC
-148 Character data not allowed

A discrete parameter was received but a character string or numeric
parameter was expected. Check the list of parameters to verify that you
have used a valid parameter type. Example: DISP:TEXT ON
-151 Invalid string data

An invalid character string was received. Check to see if you have
enclosed the character string in quotation marks and verify that the
string contains valid ASCII characters.
Example: DISP:TEXT 'TESTING (the ending quote is missing)
274

Command Errors
-158 String data not allowed

A character string was received but is not allowed for this command.
Check the list of parameters to verify that you have used a valid
parameter type. Example: BURS:NCYC 'TEN'
-161 Invalid block data

Applies only to the DATA:DAC VOLATILE command.
For a definite-length block, the number of bytes of data sent does not
4
match the number of bytes that you specified in the block header. For an
indefinite-length block, an EOI (End-or-Identify) was received without
an accompanying <new line> character.
-168 Block data not allowed

Data was sent to the function generator in arbitrary block format but
this command does not accept this format. Check to see if you have sent
the correct data type with the command. Example: BURS:NCYC #10
-170 to -178 Expression errors

The function generator does not accept mathematical expressions.
275

Execution Errors
Execution Errors
-211 Trigger ignored

A Group Execute Trigger (GET) or *TRG was received but the trigger was
ignored. Make sure that you have selected the proper trigger source and
verify that the sweep or burst mode is enabled.
-221 Settings conflict;

Option 002 (arbs) is not installed
Arbitrary waveforms are optionally available with the 33210A (Option
002). To upgrade your 33210A to include arbitrary waveform

turned off infinite burst to allow immediate trigger source
An infinite count burst is allowed only when the external or bus
(software) trigger source is selected. The burst count has been set to the
maximum N Cycle value (50,000 cycles).

infinite burst changed trigger source to BUS
An infinite count burst is allowed only when the external or bus
5 (software) trigger source is selected. Sending the BURS:NCYC INF
command has automatically changed the trigger source from immediate
to bus.

burst period increased to fit entire burst
The number of cycles specified by the BURS:NCYC command takes
priority over the burst period (as long as the burst period is not at its
maximum value). The function generator has increased the burst period
to accommodate the specified burst count or waveform frequency.

burst count reduced to fit entire burst
Since the burst period is currently at its maximum, the function generator
has reduced the burst count to allow the specified waveform frequency.
276

Execution Errors

triggered burst not available for noise
You cannot use the noise function in the triggered burst mode.

amplitude units changed to Vpp due to high-Z load
The output units (VOLT:UNIT command) cannot be set to dBm if the
output termination is currently set to “high impedance” (OUTP:LOAD
command). The function generator has converted the units to Vpp. 4
trigger output connector disabled by trigger external
When the external trigger source is selected (TRIG:SOUR EXT
“trigger out” signal. The rear-panel Trig connector cannot be used for
both operations at the same time.

trigger output connector used by burst gate
If you have selected the gated burst mode (BURS:MODE GAT command)
with burst enabled, the “trigger out” signal cannot be enabled
(OUTP:TRIG ON command). The rear-panel Trig connector cannot be
used for both operations at the same time.

trigger output connector used by trigger external
5
When the external trigger source is selected (TRIG:SOUR EXT command),
the function generator automatically disables the “trigger out” signal.
The rear-panel Trig connector cannot be used for both operations at the
same time.

frequency reduced for user function
For arbitrary waveforms, the output frequency is limited to 3 MHz.
When you change to the arbitrary waveform function (APPL:USER or
FUNC:USER command) from a function that allows a higher frequency,
the function generator will automatically adjust the frequency to 3 MHz.
277

Execution Errors

frequency changed for pulse function
For pulse waveforms, the output frequency is limited to 5 MHz.
When you change to the pulse function (APPL:PULS or FUNC:PULS
command) from a function that allows a higher frequency, the function
generator will automatically adjust the frequency to 5 MHz.

frequency reduced for ramp function
For ramp waveforms, the output frequency is limited to 100 kHz.
When you change to the ramp function (APPL:RAMP or FUNC:RAMP
command) from a function that allows a higher frequency, the function
generator will automatically adjust the frequency to 100 kHz.

frequency made compatible with burst mode
For an internally-triggered burst, the output frequency is limited to a
minimum of 2.001 mHz. The function generator has adjusted the
frequency to be compatible with the current settings.

burst turned off by selection of other mode or modulation
The function generator will allow only one modulation, sweep, or burst
mode to be enabled at the same time. When you enable a modulation,
5 sweep, or burst mode, all other modes are turned off.

FM turned off by selection of other mode or modulation
sweep, or burst mode, all other modes are turned off.

AM turned off by selection of other mode or modulation
278

Execution Errors

PWM turned off by selection of other mode or modulation

sweep turned off by selection of other mode or modulation
The function generator will allow only one modulation, sweep, or burst4

not able to modulate this function
The function generator cannot generate an AM or FM modulated
waveform using the ramp, pulse, noise, dc voltage, or arbitrary waveform
functions.

PWM available in only pulse function
The function generator cannot generate a PWM modulated waveform
using any function other than pulse.

not able to sweep this function
The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the pulse, noise,
5
dc voltage, or arbitrary waveform functions.

not able to burst this function
The function generator cannot generate a burst using the pulse, noise, dc
voltage, or arbitrary waveform functions.

not able to modulate noise, modulation turned off
The function generator cannot generate a modulated waveform using the
noise function. The selected modulation mode has been turned off.
279

Execution Errors

not able to modulate arb waveforms, modulation turned off
arbitrary waveform function. The selected modulation mode has been
turned off.

not able to modulate ramp waveforms, modulation turned off
ramp function. The selected modulation mode has been turned off.

not able to sweep pulse, sweep turned off
The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the pulse
function. The sweep mode has been turned off.

not able to modulate dc, modulation turned off
dc voltage function. The selected modulation mode has been turned off.

not able to sweep dc, sweep turned off
The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the dc voltage
5 function. The sweep mode has been turned off.

not able to burst dc, burst turned off
The function generator cannot generate a burst using the dc voltage
function. The burst mode has been turned off.

not able to burst pulse, burst turned off
The function generator cannot generate a burst using the pulse function.
The burst mode has been turned off.

not able to burst arb waveforms, burst turned off
The function generator cannot generate a burst using the arbitrary
waveform function. The burst mode has been turned off.
280

Execution Errors

not able to burst noise, burst turned off
The function generator cannot generate a burst using the noise function.
The burst mode has been turned off.

not able to sweep noise, sweep turned off
The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the noise function.
The sweep mode has been turned off. 4
not able to sweep arb waveforms, sweep turned off
The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the arbitrary
waveform function. The sweep mode has been turned off.

pulse width decreased due to period
For a pulse waveform, the function generator will automatically adjust
the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate
a valid pulse: (1) edge time, (2) pulse width or duty cycle, and then (3)
period.
In this case, the function generator has decreased the pulse width to
accommodate the specified period (the edge time is already at its
minimum setting).
5
pulse duty cycle decreased due to period
the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate
a valid pulse: (1) edge time, (2) pulse width or duty cycle, and then (3)
period.
In this case, the function generator has decreased the pulse duty cycle to
accommodate the specified period (the edge time is already at its
minimum setting).
281

Execution Errors

edge time decreased due to period
the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate a
valid pulse: (1) edge time, (2) pulse width or duty cycle, and then (3)
period.
In this case, the function generator has decreased the edge time to
accommodate the specified period and preserve the pulse width setting.

pulse width increased due to large period
For a pulse waveform, the minimum pulse width is 40 ns for periods up
to 10 seconds. For periods above 10 seconds, the minimum pulse width is
greater. The function generator has adjusted the pulse width to the new
minimum determined by the current period. See “Pulse Configuration
Commands” in chapter 4 for further information.

edge time decreased due to pulse width
period.
5 In this case, the function generator has decreased the edge time to
accommodate the specified pulse width.

edge time decreased due to pulse duty cycle
period.
In this case, the function generator has decreased the edge time to
accommodate the specified pulse duty cycle.
282

Execution Errors

amplitude changed due to function
In some cases, the amplitude limits are determined by the output units
currently selected. This may occur when the units are Vrms or dBm due
to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions.
automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3.536 Vrms (upper limit for
sine waves in Vrms). 4
offset changed on exit from dc function
In the dc voltage function, the voltage level is controlled by adjusting the
offset voltage (the current amplitude is ignored). When you select a
different function, the function generator will adjust the offset voltage as
needed to be compatible with the current amplitude setting.

FM deviation cannot exceed carrier
The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the
frequency deviation. If you set the carrier to a value less than the
deviation frequency (with FM enabled), the function generator will
automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the
present carrier frequency.

5
FM deviation exceeds max frequency
The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or
(10.1 MHz for sine and square waveforms). If you set the carrier to a
value that is not valid, the function generator will automatically adjust
the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier
frequency.

PWM deviation decreased due to pulse parameters
The PWM deviation is limited by the pulse width or duty cycle, edge
time, and period. The PWM deviation (width or duty cycle deviation) is
adjusted to fit within these limits. See “Pulse Width Modulation (PWM
Commands” in chapter 4 for further information.
283

Execution Errors

frequency forced duty cycle change
If the square wave function is selected and you change to a frequency
that cannot produce the current duty cycle, the duty cycle is
automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new frequency.
For example, if you currently have the duty cycle set to 70% and then
change the frequency to 6 MHz, the function generator will automatically
adjust the duty cycle to 60% (upper limit for this frequency).
Duty Cycle: 20% to 80% (to 5 MHz)
40% to 60% (to 10 MHz)

marker forced into sweep span
The marker must be within the sweep span, between the start and stop
frequency. The marker frequency is forced into that range.

selected arb is missing, changing selection to default
If you delete an arbitrary waveform from non-volatile memory after
storing the instrument state, the waveform data is lost and the function
generator will not output the waveform when the state is recalled.
The built-in “exponential rise” waveform is output in place of the
deleted waveform.
5 -221 Settings conflict;

offset changed due to amplitude
The relationship between offset voltage and output amplitude is shown
below. Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output
termination (5 volts for a 50Ω load or 10 volts for a high-impedance load).
If the existing offset voltage is not valid, the function generator will
amplitude specified.
|Voffset| < Vmax – Vpp -----------
2
284

Execution Errors

amplitude changed due to offset
The relationship between output amplitude and offset voltage is shown
below. Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output
termination (5 volts for a 50Ω load or 10 volts for a high-impedance load).
If the existing amplitude is not valid, the function generator will
automatically adjust it to the maximum value allowed with the offset
voltage specified.
4
Vpp < 2 X (Vmax – |Voffset|)

low level changed due to high level
You can set the levels to a positive or negative value, but note that the
high level must always be greater than the low level. If you specify a high
level that is less than the existing low level, the function generator will
automatically set the low level to be 1 mV less than the high level.

high level changed due to low level
You can set the levels to a positive or negative value, but note that the
high level must always be greater than the low level. If you specify a low
level that is greater than the existing high level, the function generator
will automatically set the high level to be 1 mV greater than the low
level.
5
-222 Data out of range;
value clipped to upper limit
The specified parameter is outside of the function generator’s capability.
The function generator has adjusted the parameter to the maximum
value allowed. Example: PHAS 1000

value clipped to lower limit
The specified parameter is outside of the function generator’s capability.
The function generator has adjusted the parameter to the minimum
value allowed. Example: PHAS -1000
285

Execution Errors

pulse edge time limited by period; value clipped to upper limit
The specified edge time must fit within the existing period and width.
The function generator will limit the edge time as needed to
accommodate the existing period.

pulse width limited by period; value clipped to ...
The specified pulse width must be less than the difference between the
period and the edge time as shown below. The function generator will
adjust the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period.

pulse duty cycle limited by period; value clipped to ...
The specified pulse duty cycle must conform to the following period and
edge time restriction. The function generator will adjust the pulse duty
cycle as needed to accommodate the specified period.
Duty Cycle < 100 X (Period – (1.6 X Edge Time)) ÷ Period

large period limits minimum pulse width
5 For a pulse waveform, the minimum pulse width is 40 ns for periods up
to 10 seconds. For periods above 10 seconds, the minimum pulse width is
greater. See “Pulse Configuration Commands” in chapter 4 for further
information.

pulse edge time limited by width; value clipped to ...
The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse width as
shown below. The function generator will adjust the edge time as needed
to accommodate the specified pulse width.
286

Execution Errors

pulse edge time limited by duty cycle; value clipped to ...
The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse duty cycle as
shown below. The function generator will adjust the edge time as needed
to accommodate the specified pulse duty cycle.
-222 Data out of range; 4

period; value clipped to ...
This generic message indicates that the pulse period has been limited to
an upper or lower boundary.

frequency; value clipped to ...
This generic message indicates that the waveform frequency has been
limited to an upper or lower boundary.

user frequency; value clipped to upper limit
limited to an upper boundary due to the selection of the arbitrary
waveform function (APPL:USER or FUNC:USER command).

ramp frequency; value clipped to upper limit
5
limited to an upper boundary due to the selection of the ramp waveform
function (APPL:RAMP or FUNC:RAMP command).

pulse frequency; value clipped to upper limit
limited to an upper boundary due to the selection of the pulse waveform
function (APPL:PULS or FUNC:PULS command).

burst period; value clipped to ...
This generic message indicates that the burst period has been limited to
287

Execution Errors

burst count; value clipped to ...
This generic message indicates that the burst count has been limited to

burst period limited by length of burst; value clipped to lower limit
It is not possible to specify a burst period which is too short for the
re-trigger the burst.
Burst Count
Burst Period > ----------------------------------------------------------
- + 200 ns
Waveform Frequency

burst count limited by length of burst; value clipped to upper limit
If the Immediate trigger source is selected (TRIG:SOUR IMM command),
the burst count must be less than the product of the burst period and the
waveform frequency as shown below.
Burst Count < Burst Period X Waveform Frequency
5 -222 Data out of range;

amplitude; value clipped to ...
This generic message indicates that the waveform amplitude has been
limited to an upper or lower boundary.

offset; value clipped to ...
This generic message indicates that the offset voltage has been limited to

frequency in burst mode; value clipped to ...
This generic message indicates that the frequency has been limited to an
upper or lower boundary as dictated by the burst period.
288

Execution Errors

frequency in FM; value clipped to ...
This generic message indicates that the carrier frequency has been
limited to a lower boundary as determined by the FM:DEV command.
The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the
frequency deviation.

marker confined to sweep span; value clipped to ... 4
This generic message indicates that the specified marker frequency is
outside the range of the start frequency and stop frequency. The marker
frequency must be between the specified start frequency and stop
frequency. If you attempt to set the marker frequency to a frequency
not in this range, the function generator will automatically set the
marker frequency equal to the start frequency or stop frequency
(whichever is closer). This error is generated only when both the sweep
mode and the marker frequency are enabled.

pulse width; value clipped to ...
This generic message indicates that the desired pulse width is limited to
an upper or lower boundary which is dictated by the instrument
hardware.

pulse edge time; value clipped to ...
5
This generic message indicates that the desired edge time is limited to
an upper or lower boundary which is dictated by the instrument
hardware.

FM deviation; value clipped to ...
This generic message indicates that the desired FM deviation is limited
to a lower or upper boundary as set by the current function’s frequency.

FM deviation limited by minimum frequency
The frequency deviation is limited to the lower limit (1 mHz).
289

Execution Errors

FM deviation limited by maximum frequency; value clipped to
upper limit
The frequency deviation cannot exceed the carrier frequency, and is
limited as follows: 5 MHz for sine or square wave carriers.

PWM deviation
The PWM deviation is limited. Width deviation can be from 0 to the
width of the underlying pulse waveform. Duty cycle deviation can be
from 0 to the duty cycle of the underlying pulse waveform. Both are
further limited by the minimum pulse width and edge time parameters.

PWM deviation limited by pulse parameters
The PWM deviation is limited by the current pulse parameters. The
PWM deviation (width or duty cycle) is set to accommodate the current
pulse width or duty cycle, edge time, and period.

duty cycle; value clipped to ...
The square wave duty cycle is limited to values between 20% and 80% by
instrument hardware.
5 -222 Data out of range;

duty cycle limited by frequency; value clipped to upper limit
The square wave duty cycle is limited to values between 40% and 60%
when the frequency is greater than 5 MHz.
Duty Cycle: 20% to 80% (to 5 MHz)
40% to 60% (to 10 MHz)
-223 Too much data

An arbitrary waveform was specified that contains more than 8,192
waveform points. Verify the number of points in the DATA VOLATILE or
DATA:DAC VOLATILE command.
-224 Illegal parameter value;

An exact parameter value, from a list of possible values, was expected.
290

Device Dependent Errors
Device Dependent Errors
-313 Calibration memory lost;

memory corruption detected
The non-volatile memory used to store the function generator’s calibration
constants has detected a checksum error. This error may be the result of 4
a device failure or extreme conditions such as lightning or strong
magnetic fields.
-314 Save/recall memory lost;

The non-volatile memory used to store instrument states has detected a
checksum error. This error may be the result of a device failure or
extreme conditions such as lightning or strong magnetic fields.
-315 Configuration memory lost;

The non-volatile memory used to store the function generator’s
configuration settings (i.e., remote interface settings) has detected a
checksum error. This error may be the result of a device failure or
extreme conditions such as lightning or strong magnetic fields.
-350 Queue overflow 5

The error queue is full because more than 20 errors have occurred.
No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue.
The error queue is cleared by the *CLS (clear status) command or when
the power is cycled. The errors are also cleared when you read the queue.
The error queue is not cleared by an instrument reset (*RST command).
291

Query Errors
Query Errors
-410 Query INTERRUPTED

A command was received but the output buffer contained data from a
previous command (the previous data is lost).
-420 Query UNTERMINATED

The function generator was addressed to talk (i.e., to send data over the
interface) but a command has not been received which sends data to the
output buffer. For example, you may have executed an APPLy command
(which does not generate data) and then attempted an “Enter” statement
to read data from the interface.
-430 Query DEADLOCKED

A command was received which generates too much data to fit in the
output buffer and the input buffer is also full. Command execution
continues but all data is lost.
-440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response

The *IDN? command must be the last query command within a
command string. Example: *IDN?;:SYST:VERS?
292

Instrument Errors
Instrument Errors
501 to 502 501: Cross-isolation UART framing error

502: Cross-isolation UART overrun error
These errors indicate an internal hardware failure. The isolation between
chassis ground circuits and floating circuits is controlled by an optical 4
isolation barrier and a serial link.
580 Reference phase-locked loop is unlocked

The PHAS:UNL:ERR:STAT has been enabled (“on”) and the internal
phase-locked loop that controls the frequency is currently unlocked.
This error is most likely to occur when the external reference is out of
lock range.
293

Self-Test Errors
Self-Test Errors
The following errors indicate failures that may occur during a self-test.
Refer to the Agilent 33210A Service Guide for more information.
601 Self-test failed; system logic

This error indicates a failure of the main processor, system RAM, or
system ROM.
603 Self-test failed; waveform logic

This error indicates that the waveform logic in the synthesis IC has
failed.
604 Self-test failed; waveform memory bank

This error indicates that either the waveform RAM or the synthesis IC
has failed.
605 Self-test failed; modulation memory bank

This error indicates that the modulation memory bank in the synthesis
IC has failed.
606 Self-test failed; cross-isolation interface

5 This error indicates that the cross-isolation interface between the main
processor and the synthesis IC has failed, or that the synthesis IC itself
has failed.
616 Self-test failed; pulse phase locked loop

This error indicates that a phase locked loop in the pulse waveform
synthesizer is not correctly locking, and that the frequency of pulse
waveforms (only) may not be correct. Indicates a failure of the synthesis
IC or associated circuitry.
619 to 621 619: Self-test failed; leading edge DAC

623 to 625 620: Self-test failed; trailing edge DAC
621: Self-test failed; square-wave threshold DAC
623: Self-test failed; dc offset DAC
624: Self-test failed; null DAC
625: Self-test failed; amplitude DAC
These errors indicate a malfunctioning system DAC, failed
DAC multiplexer channels, or associated circuitry.
294

Self-Test Errors
622 Self-test failed; time base calibration DAC

This error indicates that the time base calibration DAC in the
synthesis IC, or voltage controlled oscillator, has failed.
626 to 629 626: Self-test failed; waveform filter path select relay
627: Self-test failed; -10 dB attenuator path
628: Self-test failed; -20 dB attenuator path
629: Self-test failed; +20 dB amplifier path
These errors indicate that the specified relay is not being properly 4
switched or the attenuator/amplifier is not providing the expected
attenuation or gain. These self-tests use the internal ADC to verify that
the output path relays, output amplifier (+20 dB), and output
attenuators are operating properly.
630 Self-test failed; internal ADC over-range condition

This error indicates a probable ADC failure. The failure could be of the
system ADC, the ADC input multiplexer, or the ADC input buffer
amplifier.
631 Self-test failed; internal ADC measurement error

This error indicates a probable ADC failure. The failure could be of the
system ADC, the ADC input multiplexer, or the ADC input buffer
amplifier.
632 Self-test failed; square/pulse DAC test failure

This error indicates a probable failure of the square/pulse DAC.
5
295

Calibration Errors
Calibration Errors
The following errors indicate failures that may occur during a calibration
procedure (see chapter 4 in the Agilent 33210A Service Guide).
701 Calibration error; security defeated by hardware jumper

The function generator’s calibration security feature has been disabled
by temporarily shorting the two “CAL ENABLE” pads on the internal
circuit board, as described in the Agilent 33210A Service Guide.
702 Calibration error; calibration memory is secured

A calibration cannot be performed when calibration memory is secured.
To unsecure the instrument, use the CAL:SEC:STAT ON command with
the correct security code.
703 Calibration error; secure code provided was invalid

Invalid security code specified with the CAL:SEC:STAT ON command.
706 Calibration error; provided value is out of range

The calibration value specified with the CAL:VAL command is out of range.
707 Calibration error; signal input is out of range

The internal analog-to-digital converter (ADC) has determined that the
5 signal applied to the rear-panel Modulation In connector is out of range.
707 707: Calibration error; cal edge time: rise time cal error
707: Calibration error; cal edge time: fall time cal error
707: Calibration error; cal edge time: default values loaded
Indicates a failure in the rise-time or fall-time circuitry has prevented
calibration. The edge time was calibrated using default values, limiting
accuracy. See the Agilent 33210A Service Guide for service information.
850 Calibration error; setup is invalid

You have specified an invalid calibration setup number with the
CAL:SET command. Refer to the Agilent 33210A Service Guide for more
information on the calibration procedures.
851 Calibration error; setup is out of order

Certain calibration setups must be performed in a specific sequence in
order to be valid. Refer to the Agilent 33210A Service Guide for more
information on the calibration procedures.
296

Arbitrary Waveform Errors

The following errors indicate failures that may occur during arbitrary
waveform operation. Refer to
“Arbitrary Waveform Commands (Option 002)” on page 222 for more
information.
4
770 Nonvolatile arb waveform memory corruption detected
The non-volatile memory used to store arbitrary waveforms has detected a
checksum error. The arbitrary waveform cannot be retrieved from memory.
781 Not enough memory to store new arb waveform; use DATA:DELETE
The four non-volatile memory locations already contain arbitrary
waveforms. To store another waveform, you must first delete one of the
stored waveforms using the DATA:DELete command.
781 Not enough memory to store new arb waveform; bad sectors
Due to a hardware error, there are no more memory locations available
to store arbitrary waveforms. This error is likely the result of a failed
Flash memory device.
782 Cannot overwrite a built-in waveform

The following built-in waveform names are reserved and cannot be used
with the DATA:COPY command: “EXP_RISE”, “EXP_FALL”,
5
“NEG_RAMP”, “SINC”, and “CARDIAC”.
784 Name of source arb waveform for copy must be VOLATILE

When using the DATA:COPY command, you cannot copy from any source
other than “VOLATILE”.
785 Specified arb waveform does not exist

The DATA:COPY command copies the waveform from volatile memory to
the specified name in non-volatile memory. Before executing the
DATA:COPY command, you must download the waveform using the
DATA VOLATILE or DATA:DAC VOLATILE command.
297

786 Not able to delete a built-in arb waveform

You cannot delete any of the five built-in waveforms: “EXP_RISE”,
“EXP_FALL”, “NEG_RAMP”, “SINC”, and “CARDIAC”.
787 Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform
You cannot delete the arbitrary waveform that is currently being output
(FUNC:USER command).
788 Cannot copy to VOLATILE arb waveform

The DATA:COPY command copies the waveform from volatile memory to
the specified name in non-volatile memory. The source for the copy is
always “VOLATILE”. You cannot copy from any other source and you
cannot copy to “VOLATILE”.
800 Block length must be even

The function generator represents binary data as 16-bit integers,
which are sent as two bytes (DATA:DAC VOLATILE command).
810 State has not been stored

The storage location that you specified in the *RCL command was not
used in a previous *SAV command. You cannot recall the instrument
state from a storage location that is empty.
298
6
Application Programs
Application Programs
This chapter contains several remote interface example programs to
help you develop programs for your own application. Chapter 4,
“Remote Interface Reference” starting on page 145, lists the syntax for
the SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
commands available to program the function generator.
Introduction
Six example programs are included in this chapter to demonstrate
controlling the Agilent 33210A using SCPI commands. All of these
programs are written in Microsoft® Visual BASIC® 6.0 and use Agilent
VISA-COM.
The BASIC programs in this chapter, and other example programs
illustrating the use of several drivers and environments, are included on
the “Agilent 33210A Product Reference CD-ROM” shipped with the
function generator. For a detailed description of these programs, refer to
the “readme” file in the “Examples” directory. The programs in this
chapter are found in the “Examples\chapter6” subdirectory.
If you want to modify the example programs, or write your own programs
and compile them, you will need to install the Agilent IO Libraries Suite
software. You can install this software from the “Agilent E2094
Automation-Ready CD-ROM” that is also provided with the 33210A.
You may have previously installed the IO Libraries Suite software that
was provided with other Agilent products (such as an Agilent GPIB card).
However, you must have Agilent IO Libraries Suite 14.0 or a later version
to support the examples that are provided on the Product Reference CD-
ROM.
6
For information on obtaining the Agilent IO Libraries Suite software, see:
www.agilent.com/find/iolib
Microsoft® and Visual BASIC® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
300
Chapter 6 Application Programs

Introduction
Once you have installed the appropriate software components, see

“Remote Interface Configuration” in chapter 3 for information on
configuring your interface.
The programs listed in this chapter are protected by copyright.

Copyright © 2003, 2008 Agilent Technologies, Inc.
4
You have a royalty-free right to use, modify, reproduce and distribute the
Sample Application Files (and/or any modified version) in any way you
find useful, provided that you agree that Agilent has no warranty,
obligations, or liability for any Sample Application Files.
Agilent Technologies provides programming examples for illustration
only. All sample programs assume that you are familiar with the
programming language being demonstrated and the tools used to create
and debug procedures. Agilent support engineers can help explain the
functionality of Agilent software components and associated commands,
but they will not modify these samples to provide added functionality or
construct procedures to meet your specific needs.
All of the sample application programs in this chapter are example

programs intended for use with Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0 and Agilent
VISA-COM.
To use the IO object in Visual Basic:
1. Set the reference to include the libraries in the Project/References

menu. VISA COM requires a COM reference to the VISA COM 3.0
Type library. Establish a reference in the menu:
Project > References ... 6
2. Use a statement such as “Dim Fgen As VisaComLib.FormattedIO488”
to create the formatted IO reference, and use
“Set Fgen = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488” to create the actual
object.
301

Program Listings
Program Listings
Example: A Simple Sine Waveform

This program (found in the “Examples\chapter6\SimpleSine” subdirectory on the CD-
ROM) selects the function as “sine,” and then sets the frequency, amplitude and offset of
the waveform.
Private Sub cmdSimpleSine_Click()
Dim io_mgr As VisaComLib.ResourceManager

Dim Fgen As VisaComLib.FormattedIO488
Set io_mgr = New VisaComLib.ResourceManager

Set Fgen = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488
Set Fgen.IO = io_mgr.Open(txtIO.Text)
On Error GoTo MyError
' This program sets up a waveform by selecting the waveshape

' and adjusting the frequency, amplitude, and offset.
With Fgen
.WriteString "*RST" ' Reset the function generator

.IO.Clear ' Clear errors and status registers
.WriteString "FUNCtion SINusoid" ' Select waveshape

' Other options are SQUare, RAMP, PULSe, NOISe, DC, and USER
.WriteString "OUTPut:LOAD 50" ' Set the load impedance in Ohms
' (50 Ohms default)
' May also be INFinity, as when using oscilloscope or DMM
.WriteString "FREQuency 2500" ' Set the frequency.

.WriteString "VOLTage 1.2" ' Set the amplitude in Vpp.
' Also see VOLTage:UNIT
.WriteString "VOLTage:OFFSet 0.4" ' Set the offset in Volts
6 ' Voltage may also be set as VOLTage:HIGH
' and high level
and VOLTage:LOW for low level
.WriteString "OUTPut ON" ' Turn on the instrument output
End With
Exit Sub
MyError:
txtError = Err.Description & vbCrLf

Resume Next
End Sub
302

Program Listings
Example: Amplitude Modulation

This program (found in the “Examples\chapter6\AMLowLevel” subdirectory on the CD-
ROM) configures a waveform with amplitude modulation using lower-level SCPI
commands. It also shows how to use the *SAV command to store the instrument
configuration in the function generator’s internal memory.
Private Sub cmdAMLowLevels_Click()
Dim io_mgr As VisaComLib.ResourceManager 4


' This program uses low-level SCPI commands to configure

' the function gnerator to output an AM waveform.
' This program also shows how to use "state storage" to
' store the instrument configuration in memory.
With Fgen

.WriteString "OUTPut:LOAD 50" ' Output termination is 50 Ohms

.WriteString "FUNCtion:SHAPe SINusoid" ' Carrier shape is sine
.WriteString "FREQuency 5000;VOLTage 5" ' Carrier freq is 5 kHz @ 5 Vpp
.WriteString "AM:INTernal:FUNCtion SINusoid" ' Modulating shape is sine
.WriteString "AM:INTernal:FREQuency 200" ' Modulation freq = 200 Hz
.WriteString "AM:DEPTh 80" ' Modulation depth = 80%
.WriteString "AM:STATe ON" ' Turn AM modulation on

.WriteString "*SAV 1" ' Store state in memory location 1
' Use the "*RCL 1" command to recall the stored state
End With
Exit Sub 6
MyError:

Resume Next
End Sub
303

Program Listings
Example: Linear Sweep

This program (found in the “Examples\chapter6\LinearSweep” subdirectory on the CD-
ROM) creates a linear sweep for a sine wave. It sets the start and stop frequencies, and
the sweep time.
Private Sub cmdLinearSweep_Click()


' This program sets up a linear sweep using a sinusoid

' waveform. It sets the start and stop frequency and sweep
' time.
With Fgen

.WriteString "FUNCtion SINusoid" ' Select waveshape

.WriteString "OUTPut:LOAD 50" ' Set the load impedance to
' 50 Ohms (default)
.WriteString "VOLTage 1" ' Set the amplitude to 1 Vpp.
.WriteString "SWEep:SPACing LINear" ' Set Linear or LOG spacing

.WriteString "SWEep:TIME 1" ' Sweep time is 1 second
.WriteString "FREQuency:STARt 100" ' Start frequency is 100 Hz
.WriteString "FREQuency:STOP 20e3" ' Stop frequency is 20 kHz
' Frequency sweep limits may also be set as FREQuency:CENTer and

' FREQuency:SPAN on the 332x0A
' For the 332x0A, also see MARKer:FREQuency

.WriteString "SWEep:STATe ON" ' Turn sweep on
6 End With
Exit Sub
MyError:

Resume Next
End Sub
304

Program Listings
Example: A Pulse Waveform

This program (found in the “Examples\chapter6\Pulse” subdirectory on the CD-ROM)
configures a pulse waveform, setting pulse width, period, and high/low levels. The edge
time is then incremented.
Private Declare Sub Sleep Lib "kernel32" (ByVal dwMilliseconds As Long)
Private Sub cmdPulse_Click()

4
Dim I As Integer
' This program sets up a pulse waveshape and adjusts the edge
' time. It also shows the use of high and low voltage levels
' and period. The edge time is adjusted by 5 nsec increments.
With Fgen

.WriteString "FUNCtion PULSe" ' Select pulse waveshape
.WriteString "OUTPut:LOAD 50" ' Set the load impedance to 50 Ohms
' (default)
.WriteString "VOLTage:LOW 0" ' Low level = 0 V
.WriteString "VOLTage:HIGH 0.75" ' High level = .75 V
.WriteString "PULSe:PERiod 1e-3" ' 1 ms intervals

.WriteString "PULSe:WIDTh 100e-6" ' Pulse width is 100 us
.WriteString "PULSe:TRANsition 20e-9" ' Edge time is 20 ns
' (rise time = fall time)
For I = 0 To 18
' Vary edge by 5 nsec steps
.WriteString "PULSe:TRANsition " & (0.00000001 + I * 0.000000005) 6
Sleep 300 ' Wait 300 msec
Next I
End With
Exit Sub
MyError:

Resume Next
End Sub
305

Program Listings
Example: Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)

This program (found in the “Examples\chapter6\PulseWidthMod” subdirectory on the
CD-ROM) configures a pulse waveform with duty cycle, which is then slowly modulated
by a triangle waveform.
Private Sub cmdPWM_Click()


' This program uses low-level SCPI commands to configure

' the function gnerator to output an PWM waveform.
' The pulse is set up with a duty cycle of 35% and a depth
' of 15%, and will vary in width from 20% to 50% with the
' modulation. The pulse may also be configured in time
' units (pulse width and deviation) rather than duty cycle
' if preferred.
With Fgen

.IO.Clear ' Clear errors & status registers

.WriteString "FUNCtion:SHAPe PULSe" ' Carrier waveshape is pulse
.WriteString "FREQuency 5000" ' Carrier frequency is 5 kHz
.WriteString "VOLTage:LOW 0" ' Set parameters to 5 V TTL
.WriteString "VOLTage:HIGH 5"
.WriteString "FUNCtion:PULSe:DCYCle 35" ' Begin with 35% duty cycle
.WriteString "PWM:INTernal:FUNCtion TRIangle" ' Modulating waveshape
' is triangle
.WriteString "PWM:INTernal:FREQuency 2" ' Modulation frequency is 2 Hz
.WriteString "PWM:DEViation:DCYCle 15" ' Modulation depth is 15%
.WriteString "PWM:SOURce INTernal" ' Use internal signal for
' modulation
' If using an external signal for PWM, connect the signal to the
6 ' rear-panel BNC and use the command PWM:SOURce EXTernal
.WriteString "PWM:STATe ON" ' Turn PWM modulation on
End With
Exit Sub
MyError:

Resume Next
End Sub
306

Program Listings
Example: Downloading an Arbitrary Waveform (ASCII)

This program (found in the “Examples\chapter6\ASCIIarb” subdirectory on the CD-
ROM) downloads an arbitrary waveform to the function generator as ASCII data. Data
values are in the range -1 to +1.
Private Sub cmdASCIIArb_Click()

Dim Fgen As VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 4
Dim Waveform() As String

Dim I As Integer
Dim DataStr As String
ReDim Waveform(1 To 4000)

' This program uses the arbitrary waveform function to
' download and output a square wave pulse with a calculated
' rise time and fall time. The waveform consists of 4000
' points downloaded to the function generator as ASCII data.
With Fgen
.IO.Timeout = 40000 ' Set timeout to 40 seconds for long
' download strings
End With
' Compute waveform
txtError.Text = ""
txtError.SelText = "Computing Waveform..." & vbCrLf
For I = 1 To 5
Waveform(I) = Str$((I - 1) / 5) ' Set rise time (5 points)
Next I
For I = 6 To 205
Waveform(I) = "1" ' Set pulse width (200 points) 6
Next I
For I = 206 To 210

Waveform(I) = Str$((210 - I) / 5) ' Set fall time (5 points)
Next I
For I = 211 To 4000

Waveform(I) = "0" ' Set remaining points to zero
Next I
DataStr = Join(Waveform, ",") ' Create string from data array
Continued...
307

Program Listings
' Download data points to volatile memory
txtError.SelText = "Downloading Arb..." & vbCrLf
With Fgen
.WriteString "DATA VOLATILE, " & DataStr
End With
txtError.SelText = "Download Complete" & vbCrLf
' Set up arbitrary waveform and output
With Fgen
.WriteString "DATA:COPY PULSE, VOLATILE" ' Copy arb to non-volatile

' memory
.WriteString "FUNCtion:USER PULSE" ' Select the active arb waveform
.WriteString "FUNCtion:SHAPe USER" ' Output the selected arb waveform

.WriteString "FREQuency 5000;VOLTage 5" ' Output frequency is 5 kHz
' @ 5 Vpp
.WriteString "OUTPut ON" ' Enable Output
End With
Exit Sub
MyError:

Resume Next
End Sub
308
Tutorial
7
Tutorial
In order to achieve the best performance from the Agilent 33210A, it may
be helpful for you to gain a better understanding of the internal operations
of the instrument. This chapter describes basic signal-generation
concepts and gives specific details on the internal operations of the
function generator.
• Direct Digital Synthesis on page 311

• Creating Arbitrary Waveforms (Option 002) on page 314
• Square Waveform Generation on page 316
• Pulse Waveform Generation on page 317
• Signal Imperfections on page 318
• Output Amplitude Control on page 320
• Ground Loops on page 322
• Attributes of AC Signals on page 323
• Modulation on page 326
• Frequency Sweep on page 329
• Burst on page 331
You can use an arbitrary waveform generator in a variety of applications

where it might be otherwise difficult or impossible to generate complex
output waveforms. With an arbitrary waveform generator, signal
imperfections such as rise time, ringing, glitches, noise, and random
timing variations can be easily simulated in a controlled manner.
Physics, chemistry, biomedicine, electronics, mechanics, and other fields
can benefit from the versatility of an arbitrary waveform generator.
Wherever things vibrate, pump, pulse, bubble, burst, or change with
time in any way, there are possible applications – limited only by your
ability to specify the waveform data.
310
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Direct Digital Synthesis

The Agilent 33210A uses a signal-generation technique called Direct
Digital Synthesis (DDS) for all waveform functions except pulse. As shown
below, a stream of digital data representing the desired waveform is
sequentially read from waveform memory and is applied to the input of a
digital-to-analog converter (DAC). The DAC is clocked at the function
generator’s sampling frequency of 50 MHz and outputs a series of voltage4
steps approximating the desired waveform. A low-pass “anti-aliasing”
filter then smooths the voltage steps to create the final waveform.
Waveform
Memory Anti-Aliasing
50 MHz Filter
Address Data
Waveform
DAC
Direct Digital Synthesis Circuitry
The 33210A uses two anti-aliasing filters. An elliptical filter is used for
continuous sine waves because of its nearly flat passband and sharp
cutoff above 10 MHz. Since elliptical filters exhibit severe ringing for
waveforms other than continuous sine waves, a linear-phase filter is
used for all other waveform functions.
For standard waveforms, the function generator uses waveform memory
that is equivalent to 16,384 (16K) words deep. For optional arbitrary
waveforms, the function generator uses waveform memory that is
equivalent to 8,192 (8K) words deep.
311
Chapter 7 Tutorial
The 33210A represents amplitude values by 16,384 discrete voltage

levels (or 14-bit vertical resolution). The specified waveform data is
divided into samples such that one waveform cycle exactly fills waveform
memory (see the illustration below for a sine wave). If you create an
arbitrary waveform that does not contain exactly 8K points, the
waveform is automatically “stretched” by repeating points or by
interpolating between existing points as needed to fill waveform memory.
Since all of waveform memory is filled with one waveform cycle, each
memory location corresponds to a phase angle of 2π /8,192 radians.
+8191
4095 8191
(180°) (360°)
DAC Memory Address
0
Code (Phase)
2047 6143
(90°) (270°)
-8191
Sine Wave Representation in Waveform Memory
Direct digital synthesis (DDS) generators use a phase accumulation

technique to control waveform memory addressing. Instead of using a
counter to generate sequential memory addresses, an “adder” is used
(see the following page). On each clock cycle, the constant loaded into
the phase increment register (PIR) is added to the present result in the
phase accumulator. The most-significant bits of the phase accumulator
output are used to address waveform memory. By changing the PIR
constant, the number of clock cycles required to step through the entire
waveform memory changes, thus changing the output frequency.
The PIR determines how fast the phase value changes with time and
thereby controls the frequency being synthesized. More bits in the phase
accumulator result in finer frequency resolution. Since the PIR affects
only the rate of change of the phase value (and not the phase itself),
7 changes in waveform frequency are phase-continuous.
312
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Phase
Increment
Register (PIR)
Adder
64 Bits 50 MHz
MSBs
64 Bits 64 Bits (13 or 14 bits)
Waveform
4
Memory
Address
Phase
Register
Phase Accumulator Circuitry
The 33210A uses a 64-bit phase accumulator which yields 2-64 x 50 MHz or
2.7 picohertz frequency resolution internally. Note that only the 13 or 14
most-significant bits of the Phase Register are used to address waveform
memory. Therefore, when synthesizing low frequencies (less than 3.05
kHz for a typical, 16K point standard waveform), the address will not
change in every clock cycle. However, at higher frequencies (greater than
3.05 kHz), the address will change by more than one location during each
clock cycle and some points will be skipped. If too many points are
skipped, a phenomenon known as “aliasing” will occur and the waveform
output will become somewhat distorted.
The Nyquist Sampling Theorem states that in order to prevent aliasing,

the highest frequency component of the desired output waveform must
be less than half of the sampling frequency. The Agilent 33210A
samples at 50 MHz, so Nyquist limits the highest frequency component
to 25 MHz while the anti-alias filtering limits the highest frequency
component to less than this. 7
313
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Creating Arbitrary Waveforms (Option 002)

The Agilent 33210A allows you to create custom arbitrary waveforms of up
to 8 K points (8,192 points), and provides five built-in examples of
arbitrary waveforms. You can create an arbitrary waveform from the front
panel, or you can use the Agilent IntuiLink software provided on the CD-
ROM included with the Agilent 33210A. The Agilent IntuiLink software
allows you to create arbitrary waveforms using a graphical user interface
on your PC, and then download them into the Agilent 33210A. You can
also capture waveforms from your Agilent oscilloscope and import them
into IntuiLink. Please see the online help included with the Agilent
IntuiLink software for further information.
For most applications, it is not necessary to create an arbitrary waveform
with a specific number of points since the function generator will repeat
points (or interpolate) as necessary to fill waveform memory. For example,
if you specify 100 points, each waveform point will be repeated an
average of 8,192 / 100 or 81.92 times. For the 33210A, you do not have to
change the length of the waveform to change its output frequency.
All you have to do is create a waveform of any length and then adjust the
function generator’s output frequency. However, in order to get the best
results (and minimize voltage quantization errors), it is recommended
that you use the full amplitude range of the waveform DAC.
When entering waveform points from the function generator’s front panel,
you are not required to enter the points at evenly-spaced intervals in time.
You can always add additional points as needed where the waveform is
more complex. From the front panel only, you can also use linear
interpolation to smooth the transition between waveform points.
These features make it possible to create useful arbitrary waveforms
using a relatively small number of points.
With the 33210A, you can output an arbitrary waveform to an upper
frequency limit of 3 MHz. However, note that the useful upper limit is
7 usually less due to the function generator’s bandwidth limitation and
aliasing. Waveform frequency components above the function generator’s
bandwidth will be attenuated.
314
Chapter 7 Tutorial
For example, consider a custom arbitrary waveform consisting of 10

cycles of a sine waveform. When you set the function generator’s
frequency to 1 MHz, the actual output frequency will be 10 MHz and the
amplitude will be attenuated. As you increase the frequency above 1
MHz, more attenuation will occur.
When creating arbitrary waveforms, the function generator will always
attempt to replicate the finite-length time record to produce a periodic
version of the data in waveform memory. However, as shown below, it is
possible that the shape and phase of a signal may be such that a
4
discontinuity is introduced at the end point. When the waveshape is
repeated for all time, this end-point discontinuity will introduce
leakage errors in the frequency domain because many spectral terms
are required to describe the discontinuity.
Leakage error is caused when the waveform record does not include an
integral number of cycles of the fundamental frequency. Power from the
fundamental frequency, and its harmonics, is transferred to the spectral
components of the rectangular sampling function. You can reduce
leakage errors by adjusting the window length to include an integer
number of cycles or by including more cycles within the window to reduce
the residual end-point discontinuity size. Some signals are composed of
discrete, non-harmonically related frequencies. Since these signals are
non-repetitive, all frequency components cannot be harmonically related
to the window length. You should be careful in these situations to
minimize end-point discontinuities and spectral leakage.
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° /0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
1 Cycle
Arbitrary Waveform with Discontinuity 7
315
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Square Waveform Generation
Spectrum of Above Waveform at 100 kHz
Square Waveform Generation

To eliminate distortion due to aliasing at higher frequencies, the 33210A
uses a different waveform generation technique to create square waves.
Square waveforms are created by routing a DDS-generated sine wave
into a comparator. The digital output from the comparator is then used
as the basis for the square wave output. The duty cycle of the waveform
can be varied by changing the comparator’s threshold.
Waveform Anti-Aliasing
DAC Filter
Comparator
Threshold
Voltage DAC
7
Square Waveform Generation Circuitry
316
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Pulse Waveform Generation
Pulse Waveform Generation

To eliminate distortion due to aliasing at higher frequencies, the Agilent
33210A also uses a different waveform generation technique to create
pulse waveforms. For pulse waveform generation, clock cycles are
counted to derive both the period and the pulse width. To achieve fine
period resolution, the clock frequency is varied from 95 to 100 MHz by a
phase lock loop (PLL) circuit (which also multiplies the incoming 4
frequency from the DDS by five). The rising and falling edge times are
controlled by a circuit that varies the charging currents in a capacitor.
Period, pulse width, and edge time are controlled independently, within
certain limits. The pulse waveform generation circuitry is represented in
the following block diagram.
Period
Edge Time
From DDS Counter
Leading Edge Circuit
Phase 95 - 100 MHz
Lock
Loop Set
(x5) Load
Clear
Flip/Flop
Width
Counter
Trailing Edge
Load
Pulse Waveform Generation Circuitry
317
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Signal Imperfections
90% 90%
50% 50%
Pulse Width
10% 10%
Rise Time Fall Time

Period
Pulse Waveform Parameters
For sine waveforms, signal imperfections are easiest to describe and
observe in the frequency domain using a spectrum analyzer.
Any component of the output signal which has a different frequency
than the fundamental (or “carrier”) is considered to be spurious.
The signal imperfections can be categorized as harmonic, non-harmonic,
or phase noise and are specified in “decibels relative to the carrier level”
or “dBc”.
Harmonic Imperfections
Harmonic components always appear at multiples of the fundamental
frequency and are created by non-linearities in the waveform DAC and
other elements of the signal path. At low amplitudes, another possible
source of harmonic distortion is due to the current flowing through the
cable connected to the function generator’s Sync output connector.
This current can cause a small square-wave voltage drop across the
resistance of the cable’s shield and some of this voltage can be imposed
7 on the main signal. If this is a concern for your application, you should
remove the cable or disable the Sync output connector. If your application
requires that you use the Sync output connector, you can minimize the
effect by terminating the cable in a high impedance load (rather than into
a 50Ω load).
318
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Non-Harmonic Imperfections
The biggest source of non-harmonic spurious components (called “spurs”)
is the waveform DAC. Nonlinearity in the DAC leads to harmonics that
are aliased, or “folded back”, into the passband of the function generator.
These spurs are most significant when there is a simple fractional
relationship between the signal frequency and the function generator’s
sampling frequency (50 MHz).
Another source of non-harmonic spurs is the coupling of unrelated signal4
sources (such as the microprocessor clock) into the output signal.
These spurs usually have a constant amplitude (≤ -75 dBm or 112 µVpp)
regardless of the signal’s amplitude and are most troublesome at signal
amplitudes below 100 mVpp. To obtain low amplitudes with minimum
spurious content, keep the function generator’s output level relatively
high and use an external attenuator if possible.
Phase Noise
Phase noise results from small, instantaneous changes in the output
frequency (“jitter”). It is seen as an elevation of the apparent noise floor
near the fundamental frequency and increases at 6 dBc / octave with the
carrier frequency. The 33210A’s phase noise specification represents the
amplitude of the noise in a 1 Hz bandwidth, 10 kHz away from a 10-MHz
carrier.
Quantization Errors
Finite DAC resolution (14 bits) leads to voltage quantization errors.
Assuming the errors are uniformly distributed over a range of ±0.5 least-
significant bit (LSB), the equivalent noise level is
-86 dBc for a sine wave that uses the full DAC range (16,384 levels).
Similarly, finite-length waveform memory leads to phase quantization
errors. Treating these errors as low-level phase modulation and assuming
a uniform distribution over a range of ±0.5 LSB, the equivalent noise
level is -76 dBc for a sine wave that is 16K samples long. All of the
33210A’s standard waveforms use the entire DAC range and are 16K
samples in length. Any arbitrary waveforms that use less than the
entire DAC range will exhibit proportionally higher relative
quantization errors.
7
319
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Output Amplitude Control

The Agilent 33210A uses a variable reference voltage to control the
signal amplitude over a 10 dB range. As shown in the simplified block
diagram below, the output of the waveform DAC goes through an anti-
aliasing filter. Switching circuitry selects either the waveform output or
the output of the separate square/pulse DAC. Two attenuators (-10 dB
and -20 dB) are used in various combinations to control the output
amplitude in 10-dB steps over a wide range of amplitude values
(10 mVpp to 10 Vpp)
.
Variable
Vref
Waveform Anti-Aliasing
DAC Filter
Switching Attenuators Switching
Circuitry Main
Circuitry Output
0 dB or 0 dB or
-10 dB -20 dB
Square/Pulse
DAC
DC Offset Output
Amplifier
DAC
0 dB or
+20 dB
Note that the dc offset is summed with the ac signal in the output
amplifier. This allows relatively small ac signals to be offset by relatively
large dc voltages. For example, you can offset a 100 mVpp signal by
almost 5 Vdc (into a 50Ω load).
When changing ranges, the 33210A switches attenuators such that the
output voltage never exceeds the current amplitude setting. However,
momentary disruptions or "glitches" caused by switching can cause
7 problems in some applications. For this reason, the 33210A incorporates
a range hold feature to "freeze" the attenuator and amplifier switches in
their current states. However, the amplitude and offset accuracy and
resolution (as well as waveform fidelity) may be adversely affected when
reducing the amplitude below the expected range change.
320
Chapter 7 Tutorial
As shown below, the 33210A has a fixed series output impedance of 50Ω,
forming a voltage divider with the load resistance.
Agilent 33210A
50Ω
VGEN R L VL 4
As a convenience, you can specify the load impedance as seen by the

function generator and thereby display the correct load voltage. If the
actual load impedance is different than the value specified, the displayed
amplitude, offset, and high/low levels will be incorrect. Variations in
source resistance are measured and taken into account during an
instrument calibration. Therefore, the accuracy of the load voltage
depends primarily on the accuracy of the load resistance as shown below.
50
∆ VL(%) ≅ --------------------
- x ∆ RL(%)
R L + 50
321
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Ground Loops
Ground Loops
The signal-generation portion of the Agilent 33210A is isolated from
chassis (earth) ground. This isolation helps to eliminate ground loops in
your system and also allows you to reference the output signal to
voltages other than ground. The illustration below shows the function
generator connected to a load through a coaxial cable. Any difference in
ground potentials (V GND) will tend to make current IGND flow in the
shield of the cable, thus causing a voltage drop due to the shield's
impedance (ZShield). The resulting voltage drop (IGND x ZShield) appears
as an error in the load voltage. However, since the instrument is isolated,
there is a high series impedance (typically 1 MΩ in parallel with 45 nF)
in the path to oppose the flow of IGND and thereby minimize this effect.
Agilent 33210A
50Ω
ZShield
VGEN VOUT RL VL = VOUT – (IGND x ZShield)
1 MΩ
45 nF
IGND
VGND
Ground Loop Effects
7 At frequencies above a few kilohertz, a coaxial cable’s shield becomes

inductive, rather than resistive, and the cable acts as a transformer.
When this happens, it tends to force the shield and center-conductor
currents to be equal but opposite. For any voltage drop in the shield due
to IGND, there is a similar drop in the center conductor. This is known as
322
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Attributes of AC Signals
the balun effect and it reduces ground loops at higher frequencies.

Note that lower shield resistance causes the balun effect to become more
of a factor at lower frequencies. Therefore, coaxial cables with two or
three-braided shields are much better than those with single-braided or
foil shields.
To reduce errors due to ground loops, connect the function generator to
the load using a high-quality coaxial cable and ground it at the load
through the cable’s shield. If possible, make sure the function generator
and the load are connected to the same electrical outlet to minimize
4
further differences in ground potential.
The most common ac signal is a sine wave. In fact, any periodic signal
can be represented as the sum of different sine waves. The magnitude of
a sine wave is usually specified by its peak, peak-to-peak, or root-mean-
square (RMS) value. All of these measures assume that the waveform
has zero offset voltage.
VPeak
VRMS = 0.707 VPeak
VPk-Pk
T=1
f
The peak voltage of a waveform is the maximum absolute value of all

points in the waveform. The peak-to-peak voltage is the difference
between the maximum and minimum. The RMS voltage is found by
summing the squares of the voltages of every point in the waveform,
dividing the sum by the number of points, and then taking the square
root of that quotient. The RMS value of a waveform also represents the
one-cycle average power in the signal: Power = VRMS2 / RL. Crest factor
is the ratio of a signal’s peak value to its RMS value and will differ
7
according to waveshape. The table below shows several common
waveforms with their respective crest factors and RMS values.
323
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Note. If an average-reading voltmeter is used to measure the “DC

voltage” of a waveform, the reading may not agree with the DC Offset
setting of the function generator. This is because the waveform may have
a non-zero average value that would be added to the DC Offset.
You may occasionally see ac levels specified in “decibels relative to
1 milliwatt” (dBm). Since dBm represents a power level, you will need to
know the signal’s RMS voltage and the load resistance in order to make
the calculation.
dBm = 10 x log10 (P / 0.001) where P = VRMS2 / RL
324
Chapter 7 Tutorial
For a sine wave into a 50Ω load, the following table relates dBm to voltage.
dBm RMS Voltage Peak-to-Peak Voltage
+23.98 dBm 3.54 Vrms 10.00 Vpp
+13.01 dBm 1.00 Vrms 2.828 Vpp
+10.00 dBm 707 mVrms 2.000 Vpp

4
+6.99 dBm 500 mVrms 1.414 Vpp
0.00 dBm 224 mVrms 632 mVpp
-6.99 dBm 100 mVrms 283 mVpp
-10.00 dBm 70.7 mVrms 200 mVpp
-36.02 dBm 3.54 mVrms 10.0 mVpp
For 75Ω or 600Ω loads, use the following conversions.

dBm (75Ω) = dBm (50Ω) – 1.76
dBm (600Ω) = dBm (50Ω) – 10.79
325
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Modulation
Modulation
Modulation is the process of modifying a high-frequency signal (called the
carrier signal) with low-frequency information (called the modulating
signal). The carrier and modulating signals can have any waveshape,
but the carrier is usually a sine waveform.
The two most common types of modulation are amplitude modulation
(AM) and frequency modulation (FM). These two forms of modulation
modify the carrier’s amplitude or frequency, respectively, according to
the instantaneous value of the modulating signal. Pulse width
modulation (PWM) is provided for pulse waveforms only. In PWM, the
pulse width or duty cycle of the pulse waveform is varied according to the
modulating signal.
source. If you select the internal source, the modulated waveform is
generated by a secondary DDS synthesizer. If you select the external
source, the modulated waveform is controlled by the signal level present
on the function generator’s rear-panel Modulation In connector.
The external signal is sampled and digitized by an analog-to-digital
converter (ADC). With either modulation source, the result is a stream of
digital samples representing the modulating waveform.

The function generator implements a form of AM called “double-
sideband transmitted carrier.” This is the type of modulation used by
most AM radio stations.
Modulating Signal
7 Modulated Carrier
(100% depth shown)
Amplitude Modulation
326
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Modulation
The amount of amplitude modulation is called the modulation depth which

refers to the portion of the amplitude range that will be used by the
modulation. For example, a depth setting of 80% causes the amplitude to
vary from 10% to 90% of the amplitude setting (90% – 10% = 80%) with
either an internal or a full-scale (±5V) external modulating signal.

For FM, the function generator uses modulation samples to modify the4
output frequency of the instrument by changing the content of the PIR
(see “Direct Digital Synthesis” on page 311). Note that since the rear-
panel Modulation In connector is dc-coupled, you can use the 33210A to
emulate a voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO).
The variation in frequency of the modulated waveform from the carrier
frequency is called the frequency deviation. Waveforms with frequency
deviations less than 1% of the modulating signal’s bandwidth are
referred to as narrowband FM. Waveforms with larger deviations are
referred to as wideband FM. The bandwidth of the modulated signal can
be approximated by the following equations.
BW ≅ 2 x (Modulating Signal Bandwidth) For narrowband FM
BW ≅ 2 x (Deviation + Modulating Signal Bandwidth) For wideband FM
In the United States, commercial FM stations usually have a modulation
bandwidth of 15 kHz and deviation of 75 kHz, making them “wideband”.
Therefore, the modulated bandwidth is: 2 x (75 kHz + 15 kHz) = 180 kHz.
Channel spacing is 200 kHz.
Modulating Signal
Modulated Carrier
7
Frequency Modulation
327
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Modulation

PWM is used in digital audio applications, motor control circuitry,
switching power supplies, and other control applications. The Agilent
33210A provides PWM for pulse waveforms, and PWM is the only type of
modulation supported for pulse waveforms. For PWM, the amplitude of
the modulating waveform is sampled digitally and used to control the
pulse width or duty cycle of the pulse waveform.
Modulating Signal
Modulated Waveform
Pulse Width Modulation
The variation of pulse width in the modulated waveform from the pulse
width of the pulse waveform is called the width deviation. The deviation
can also be expressed in terms of duty cycle (as a percentage referenced
to the period of the pulse waveform), which is called the duty cycle
deviation. In PWM the deviation of width or duty cycle is symmetrical
around the pulse width or duty cycle of the original pulse waveform. For
example, if you specify a pulse waveform with a 10% duty cycle, and then
specify PWM with a duty cycle deviation of 5%, the modulated waveform
will have a pulse that varies in duty cycle from 5% to 15% under control
of the modulating waveform.
328
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Frequency Sweep
Frequency Sweep
Frequency sweeping is similar to FM but no modulating waveform is used.
Instead, the function generator sets the output frequency based on either
a linear or logarithmic function. In a linear sweep, the output frequency
changes in a constant “hertz per second” manner. In a logarithmic sweep,
the output frequency changes in a constant “octaves per second” or
“decades per second” manner. Logarithmic sweeps are useful for covering 4
wide frequency ranges where resolution at low frequencies could be lost
with a linear sweep.
You can generate a sweep using an internal trigger source or an external
hardware trigger source. When this source is selected, the function
sweep time specified. When the external source is selected, the function
generator will accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear-panel
Trig In connector. The function generator initiates one sweep each time
Trig In receives a TTL pulse.
A sweep consists of a finite number of small frequency steps. Since each
step takes the same amount of time, longer sweep times result in smaller
steps and therefore better resolution. The number of discrete frequency
points in the sweep is automatically calculated by the function generator
and is based on the sweep time you select.
Sync Output
Main Output
7
Frequency Sweep
For triggered sweeps, the trigger source can be an external signal,
the key, or a command received from the remote interface. The
input for external trigger signals is the rear-panel Trig In connector.
329
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Frequency Sweep
This connector accepts TTL_compatible levels and is referenced to

chassis ground (not floating ground). When not used as an input, the
Trig In connector can be configured as an output to enable the 33210A to
trigger other instruments at the same time as its internal trigger occurs.
Sync and Marker Signals

The output from the front-panel Sync connector goes “high” at the
beginning of each sweep. If you have disabled the Marker function, the
Sync signal goes “low” at the midpoint of the sweep. However, if you have
enabled the Marker function, the Sync signal goes “low” when the output
frequency reaches the specified marker frequency. The marker frequency
must be between the specified start frequency and stop frequency.
You can use the Marker function to identify a notable frequency in the
response of a device under test (DUT) – for example, you may want to
identify a resonance. To do this, connect the Sync output to one channel
of your oscilloscope and connect the DUT output to another channel.
Then, trigger the oscilloscope with the rising edge of the Sync signal to
position the start frequency on the left side of the screen. Adjust the
marker frequency until the falling edge of the Sync signal lines up with
the interesting feature in the device’s response. You can then read the
frequency from the front-panel display of the 33210A.
Sync Output
DUT Output
Sweep with Marker at DUT Resonance
330
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Burst
Burst
specified number of cycles, called a burst. You can use burst in one of
two modes: Triggered Burst (also called N Cycle burst) or Gated Burst.
Triggered Burst Mode

4
Triggered burst mode consists of a specific number of waveform cycles (1
to 50,000) and is always initiated by a trigger event. You can also set the
burst count to “Infinite,” which results in a continuous waveform once
the function generator is triggered.
Sync Output
Main Output
Three-Cycle Burst Waveform
For bursts, the trigger source can be an external signal, an internal

timer, the key, or a command received from the remote interface.
The input for the external trigger signals is the rear-panel Trig In
connector. This connector accepts TTL-compatible levels and is
referenced to chassis ground (not floating ground). When not used as an
input, the Trig In connector can be configured as an output to enable the
33210A to trigger other instruments at the same time as its internal
trigger occurs.
Triggered burst always begins and ends at the same point in the
waveform, called the start phase. A starting phase of 0° corresponds to 7
the beginning of the waveform record and 360° corresponds to the end
of the waveform record.
331
Chapter 7 Tutorial
Burst
Gated Burst Mode

In the Gated Burst mode, the output waveform is either “on” or “off ”
based on the level of the external signal applied to the rear-panel Trig In
connector. When the gate signal is true, the function generator outputs a
continuous waveform. When the gate signal goes false, the current
waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops while
remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase
of the selected waveform.
332
Specifications
8
Chapter 8 Specifications
Agilent 33210A Function / Arbitrary Waveform Generator
Waveforms Square
Frequency: 1 mHz to 10 MHz,
Standard: Sine, Square, Ramp, 1 mHz resolution
Triangle, Pulse, Noise, Rise/Fall Time: 20 ns
DC
Overshoot: < 2%
Built-in Arbitrary (Option 002[1]): Variable Duty Cycle: 20% - 80% (to 5 MHz)
Exponential rise, 40% - 60% (to 10 MHz)
Exponential fall, Asymmetry (@ 50% Duty): 1% of period + 5 ns
Negative ramp,
Sin(x)/x, Cardiac. Jitter (RMS): 1 ns + 100 ppm of
period
Waveform Characteristics Ramp, Triangle

Frequency: 1 mHz to 100 kHz,
Sine 1 mHz resolution
Frequency: 1 mHz to 10 MHz, Linearity: < 0.1% of peak output
1 mHz resolution Variable Symmetry: 0.0% to 100.0%
Amplitude Flatness: [2], [3] Pulse

Frequency: 1 mHz to 5 MHz,
(Relative to 1 KHz) 1 mHz resolution
< 100 kHz 0.1 dB Pulse Width
100 kHz to 5 MHz 0.2 dB (period < 10 s): 40 ns minimum,
10 ns resolution
5 MHz to 10 MHz 0.3 dB
Variable Edge Time: 20 ns to 100 ns
Harmonic Distortion: [3], [4] Overshoot: < 2%
Jitter (RMS): 300 ps + 0.1 ppm of
< 1 Vpp > 1 Vpp
period
DC to 20 kHz -70 dBc -70 dBc
20 kHz to 100 kHz -65 dBc -60 dBc Noise
100 kHz to 1 MHz -50 dBc -45 dBc Bandwidth: 7 MHz, typical
1 MHz to 10 MHz -40 dBc -30 dBc
8-K Arbitrary Waveform Generator
(Option 002[1])
Total Harmonic Distortion: [3], [4]
DC to 20 kHz 0.04% Frequency: 1 mHz to 3 MHz,
1 mHz resolution
Waveform Length: 2 to 8K points
Spurious (Non-Harmonic) Output: [3], [5]
Amplitude Resolution: 14 bits (including sign)
DC to 1 MHz -70 dBc
1 MHz to 10 MHz -70 dBc +6 dB/octave Sample Rate: 50 MSa/s
Minimum Rise/Fall Time: 70 ns, typical
Phase Noise
(10 kHz offset): -115 dBc / Hz, typical Linearity: < 0.1% of peak output
Settling Time: < 500 ns to 0.5% of
final value
Jitter (RMS): 6 ns + 30 ppm
Non-volatile Memory: Four waveforms
8 334
Common Characteristics Phase Offset:

Range: +360 to -360 degrees
Frequency Resolution: 0.001 degrees
Accuracy[6]: Accuracy: 20 ns
90 days: ± (10 ppm + 3 pHz)
1 year: ± (20 ppm + 3 pHz)
Modulation
Resolution: 1µHz
AM
Amplitude Carrier Waveforms: Sine, Square 4
Range: Source: Internal/External
Into 50 Ω: 10 mVpp to 10 Vpp
Internal Modulation: Sine, Square, Ramp,
Into open circuit: 20 mVpp to 20 Vpp Triangle, Noise, Arb
Accuracy (at 1 kHz): [2], [3] ± 2% of setting ± 1 (2 mHz to 20 kHz)
mVpp Depth: 0.0% to 120.0%
Units: Vpp, Vrms, dBm
Resolution: 3 digits
FM
Carrier Waveforms: Sine, Square
DC Offset Source: Internal/External
Range (peak AC + DC): ± 5 V into 50 Ω Internal Modulation: Sine, Square, Ramp,
±10 V into open circuit Triangle, Noise, Arb
(2 mHz to 20 kHz)
Accuracy: [2], [3] ± 2% of offset setting
± 0.5% of ampl. ± 2 mV Deviation: DC to 5 MHz
Resolution: 3 digits
PWM
Main Output Carrier Waveforms: Pulse
Impedance: 50 Ω typical Source: Internal/External
Isolation: 42 Vpk maximum to Internal Modulation: Sine, Square, Ramp,
earth Triangle, Noise, Arb
Protection: Short-circuit protected, (2 mHz to 20 kHz)
overload automatically Deviation: 0% to 100% of pulse
disables main output width
External Frequency Reference (Option 001) External Modulation Input
Rear Panel Input: (for AM, FM, PWM)
Lock Range: 10 MHz ± 500 Hz Voltage Range: ± 5 V full scale
Level: 100 mVpp to 5 Vpp Input Resistance: 5 kΩ typical
Impedance: 1 kΩ typical Bandwidth: DC to 20 kHz
Lock Time: < 2 seconds
Rear Panel Output:
Frequency: 10 MHz
Level: 632 mVpp (0 dBm),
typical
Impedance: 50 Ω typ, AC coupled
335
8
Sweep Programming Times (typical)

Waveforms: Sine, Square, Ramp Configuration Times
Type: Linear or Logarithmic
Direction: Up or Down USB 2.0 LAN (VXI-11) GPIB
Sweep Time: 1 ms to 500 s Function 120 ms 120 ms 120 ms
Trigger Source: Single, External, or Change
Internal Frequency 2 ms 3 ms 2 ms
Marker Falling edge of Sync Change
signal (programmable Amplitude 30 ms 30 ms 30 ms
frequency) Change
Select User 130 ms 130 ms 130 ms
Burst [7] Arb
Waveforms: Sine, Square, Ramp

Arb Download Times (binary transfer)
Type: Counted (1 to 50,000
cycles), Infinite, Gated
Start/Stop Phase: +360 to -360 degrees USB 2.0 LAN (VXI-11) GPIB
2 K points 5 ms 9 ms 10 ms
Internal Period: 1 µs to 500 s
4 K points 8 ms 15 ms 20 ms
Gate Source: External Trigger
8K points 14 ms 27 ms 40 ms
Trigger Source: Single, External, or
Internal Download times do not include setup or output time.
Trigger Characteristics
Trigger Input:
Input Level: TTL compatible
Slope: Rising or falling,
selectable
Pulse Width: > 100 ns
Input Impedance: > 10 kΩ, DC coupled
Latency: < 500 ns
Jitter (RMS) 6 ns (3.5 ns for Pulse)
Trigger Output:
Level: TTL compatible into
> 1 kΩ
Pulse Width: > 400 ns
Output Impedance: 50 Ω, typical
Maximum Rate: 1 MHz
Fanout: < 4 Agilent 33210As (or
equivalent)
8 336
General Note: Specifications

are subject to change
Power Supply: CAT II without notice. For the
latest specifications, go
100 to 240 V @ to the Agilent 33210A
50/60 Hz (-5%, +10%) product page and find
100 to 120 V @ the 33210A Datasheet.
400 Hz (± 10%) www.agilent.com/find/33210A
Power Consumption: 50 VA maximum
Operating Environment: IEC 61010
Pollution Degree 2 4
Indoor Location This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Operating Temperature: 0 °C to 55 °C
Cet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme NMB-001
Operating Humidity: 5% to 80% RH, du Canada.
non-condensing
Operating Altitude: Up to 3000 meters N10149
Storage Temperature: -30 °C to 70 °C
Floating Connector Shields
(Output, Sync, and
Modulation In only): Shields may float at
± 42 V (peak) relative to
earth ground.[8]
State Storage Memory: Power off state
automatically saved.
Four user-configurable _________________
stored states. Footnotes:
Interface: LAN, LXI-C 10/100 1
Ethernet, USB 2.0, and To upgrade your 33210A to include arbitrary
GPIB standard waveform functionality, go to
Language: SCPI - 1993, www.agilent.com/find/33210U.
IEEE-488.2 2
Add 1/10th of output amplitude and offset
Dimensions (W x H x D): specification per °C for operation outside
Bench Top: 261.1 mm by 103.8 mm
by 303.2 mm the range of 18 °C to 28 °C.
3
Rack Mount: 212.8 mm by 88.3 mm Autorange enabled.
by 272.3 mm 4
DC offset set to 0 V.
Weight: 3.4 kg (7.5 lbs) 5
Spurious output at low amplitude is
Safety Designed to: UL-1244, CSA 1010, -75 dBm (typical).
EN61010 6
Add 1 ppm / °C (average) for operation out-
EMC Tested to: MIL-461C, EN55011,
EN50082-1 side the range of 18 °C to 28 °C.
7
Vibration and Shock: MIL-T-28800, Type III, Sine and square waveforms above 3 MHz
Class 5 are allowed only with an “infinite” burst
Acoustic Noise: 30 dBa count.
8
Warm-up Time: 1 hour These shields must all float at the same
LXI Compliance: LXI Class C, V. 1.0 potential to avoid instrument damage.
337
8
Product Dimensions
All dimensions are

shown in millimeters.
8 338
Index
*CLS command 262 modulation waveshape 190 APPLy command 162

*ESE command 261 overview 189 operations performed 162
*IDN? command 238 SOURce command 190 APPLy? command 170
*LRN? command 240 STATe command 192 arbitrary waveform
*OPC command 208, 217, 241, tutorial description 326 downloading binary values 225
amplitude 18 downloading floating-point values
262
arb waveform limitations 57, 165 224
*OPC? command 208, 217, 241
dBm limitations 174 downloading integer values 225
*OPT? command 224, 241 effect of load impedance 61 front-panel operation 26
*PSC command 262 high / low level 175 option 002 query
*RCL command 234 load limitations 56, 164, 174 *OPT? 224, 241
*RST command 239 offset limitations 56, 174 arbitrary waveform limitations 175
*SAV command 233 range hold 64 arbitrary waveforms
*SRE command 259 tutorial description 320
amplitude limitations 165
*STB? command 253, 259 unit limitations 56
as modulating waveshape 118
*TRG command 208, 217, 220 units 60
Index
built-in waveforms 26, 223
*TST? command 240 amplitude modulation 72, 77
calculating crest factor 232
*WAI command 208, 217, 241 carrier frequency 73 creating from front panel 112
carrier waveform 73
10 MHz In connector 137, 247 deleting from memory 231
front-panel operation 36
10 MHz Out connector 137, 247 modulating frequency 191
error messages 297
33210A overview 2 front-panel rules 116
modulating source 76, 190 naming 117
modulating waveform 74 overview 222
A modulation depth 75, 327 point interpolation 114
ac connector 6 modulation waveshape 190 rules 118
address overview 189 tutorial description 314
GPIB 46, 128, 129 tutorial description 326 attenuator settings 178
Agilent Express 7 amplitude units
automatic power-down recall 236
converting 19
air flow 30 autorange 178, 320
angle
aliasing 313 autoranging, amplitude 64
burst phase 216
AM 72
angle, phase (burst) 215
carrier frequency 73 B
anti-aliasing filters 311
carrier waveform 73 balun effect 323
DEPTh command 191 application programs 299
APPLy beep
INTernal DC command 169 enable / disable 240, 241
FREQuency command 191 NOISe command 169 beeper 123
FUNCtion command 190 PULSe command 168 binary block format 226
modulating frequency 191 RAMP command 168 binary download, arbs 225
modulating source 76, 190 SINusoid command 168 bit definitions
modulating waveform 74 SQUare command 168 questionable data register 255
modulation depth 75, 327 USER command 169 standard event register 257
339
Index
status byte register 251 bus command parameter types 269

blank display 123 interface configuration 46, 128 command reference 145
block format, binary 226 bus (software) trigger 208, 216, 219 command summary 147
BNC bus trigger 108, 220 command terminators 268
Modulation In 76, 83, 89 byte order, binary block transfers 227 command trigger 220
brightness, display 124 configuration
built-in arbitrary waveforms 223 C GPIB 46, 128
names 228 CALibration LAN 46, 128, 135
built-in help system 27 COUNt? command 264 remote interface 46, 128
bulb-saver mode 123 SECure USB 46, 128
bumpers, removing 29 CODE command 264 connector
BURSt STATe command 263 10 MHz In 137, 247
GATE SETup command 263 10 MHz Out 137, 247
POLarity command 218, 220 STRing command 264 Modulation In 76, 83, 89
INTernal VALue command 263 Output 180
Index
PERiod command 215 calibration Sync Output 66

MODE command 213 Sync output 210
commands 263
NCYCles command 214 Trig In 110
error messages 296
PHASe command 215 Trig Out 111, 209, 218, 221
message 142
STATe command 216 context-sensitive help 27
read count 141
Burst 101 reading count 264 contrast, display 124
burst 97, 211 securing 263 count
burst count 101, 214 security code 139 burst 101, 214
burst period 102, 215 setups 263 crest factor 323
burst phase 103 storing text message 264 crest factor, arb waveforms 232
burst type 98 unsecuring 263 custom name
external trigger source 110 calibration certificate 15 arbitrary waveforms 117
front-panel operation 42 CALibration? command 263 stored states 120, 235
gate polarity 218, 220 cardiac waveform 223 cycle count
gated burst mode 331, 332 carriage return 268 burst 101, 214
modes available 211 carrying handle
N Cycle burst 98, 211, 331 changing positions 16 D
overview 211 removing 29 DATA
starting phase 215, 331 catalog
trigger out signal 105 ATTRibute
arbitrary waveforms 230 CFACtor? command 232
trigger output 111
CD-ROM, connectivity software 15 CATalog? command 230
trigger source 104
triggered mode 98, 211 CD-ROM, shipped with 33210A 300 COPY command 227
waveform frequency 100 center frequency, sweep 206 DAC VOLATILE command 225
burst phase chassis ground 6 DELete
degrees vs. radians 216 comma separator 126 ALL command 231
command errors 122, 237 DELete command 231
340
Index
NVOLatile contrast 124 exponential rise waveform 223

CATalog? command 230 displaying message 125, 239 external gated burst mode 98, 211
FREE? command 230 enable / disable 125, 238 external reference 137, 247
DATA VOLATILE command 224 number format 126 external source
dBc 318 overview 4 AM 76
dBm 60, 183, 324 DISPlay command 238 FM 83
dc offset display, graph mode 25 PWM 89
amplitude limitations 58, 166, DNS server 134, 135 external timebase 137, 247
176 domain name 134 external trigger 108, 208, 216, 219
arb waveform limitations 59, 176 dot notation 244 external trigger source 110, 111
arbitrary waveform limitations 166 and IP addresses 50
front-panel selection 20 duty cycle 62 F
load limitations 58, 166, 176 definition 62, 179
filters, anti-aliasing 311
dc voltage 175 frequency limitations 55, 62, 173,
179 firmware revision 127
front-panel selection 20
Index
DC volts front-panel selection 23 floating-point download, arbs 224
setting 22 modulation limits 179 FM 77
DDS 311 carrier frequency 79
decimal point 126 E carrier waveform 78
deviation 327
default settings 143 edge time 188
DEViation command 195
degrees 215 definition 188 frequency deviation 82, 195
delete arb waveforms 231 edge time, pulse 24, 71 INTernal
delete stored states 235 end-or-identify message 268 FREQuency command 195
depth (AM) 191, 327 EOI 268 FUNCtion command 194
devation (FM) 195 error modulating frequency 80, 195
deviation (FM) 82, 327 on phase unlock 248 modulating source 83, 194
device clear 270 error messages 271 modulating waveform 80
DHCP 48 errors 122, 237 modulation waveshape 194
DHCP On/Off 130 "data out of range" errors 285 overview 193
digits separator 126 "settings conflict" errors 276 SOURce command 194
dimensions arbitrary waveform errors 297 STATe command 196
calibration errors 296 tutorial description 326
product 338
device dependent errors 291 FORMat
direct digital synthesis 311
execution errors 276 BORDer command 227
DISPlay instrument errors 293 FREQuency
TEXT number allowed 237 CENTer command 206
CLEar command 239 query errors 292 SPAN command 206
TEXT command 239 self-test errors 294 STARt command 205
display 238 examples STOP command 205
brightness 124 programming 299 frequency
bulb saver mode 123 exponential fall waveform 223 burst limitation 55
341
Index
duty cycle limitations 55, 173 display overview 4 gateway address 132
front-panel selection 17 number entry 5 gaussian noise 169
function limitations 55, 163, 173 overview 3 GPIB
sweep time 93 front-panel address 46, 128, 129
FREQuency command 173 display enable/disable 125, 238 configuration 46
frequency deviation (FM) 82, 195, number format 126 connector 6
327 front-panel configuration default address 46
frequency modulation LAN 47 front-panel configuration 46
carrier frequency 79 front-panel menu setting address 46
carrier waveform 78 quick reference 33 GPIB address 242
deviation 327 front-panel menu operation 31 GPIB configuration 46, 128
frequency deviation 82, 195 front-panel selection 18 graph mode 25
modulating frequency 80, 195 FSK ground loops 321
modulating source 83, 194 tutorial description 326
modulating waveform 80 FUNCtion H
Index
modulation waveshape 194 PULSe

overview 193 handle
DCYCle command 187
tutorial description 326 changing positions 16
HOLD command 185 removing 29
frequency span, sweep 206
TRANsition command 188 harmonic distortion 334
frequency sweep 90, 329
WIDTh command 186 header, binary block 226
center frequency 92, 206
RAMP heart waveform 223
external trigger source 110
SYMMetry command 180
frequency span 92, 206 help system 27
front-panel operation 38, 40 SYMMetry? command 180 language selection 28
linear vs. logarithmic 93, 207, SQUare high impedance load 61
329 DCYCle command 179 high level 177
marker frequency 94, 210 DCYCle? command 179 setting 21
overview 203 USER command 228 high Z load 35, 61
spacing 93 function host name 133
start frequency 91 allowed with modulation 53
stop frequency 91, 205 amplitude limitations 54
I
sweep time 207 frequency limitations 54
Sync signal 91 modulation modes allowed 171 ID string 238
trigger out signal 96 pulse period limitations 185 IEEE-488
trigger output 111 FUNCtion command 171 address 46, 128
trigger source 95 FUNCtion USER command 229 binary block format 226
frequency sweeps FUNCtion? command 171 connector 6
Sync signal 92 default address 46
FREQuency? command 173 G front-panel configuration 46
front panel service request 253
gate polarity (burst) 218, 220 setting address 46
connectors 3
gated burst mode 98, 211, 332 immediate trigger 208, 216, 219
creating arb waveforms 112
342
Index
impedance J logarithmic sweep 207

effect on amplitude 61 jitter 319 low level 177
impedance, load 35 setting 21
imperfections, signal 318 L
instrument calibration M
LAN
commands 263
auto ip 243 MAC address 135, 244
error messages 296 manual trigger 107
Configuration 129
reading count 264 MARKer
configuration 135
securing 263
connector 6 FREQuency command 210
storing text message 264
DHCP 130 marker frequency 94, 210
instrument errors 122, 237
DNS server 134, 135 marker signal 330
instrument ID string 238 domain name 134 MAV 254
instrument overview 2 front-panel configuration 47 mediasense 244
instrument reset 35, 239 gateway 132 MEMory
instrument self test 124, 240 host name 133
Index
NSTates? command 236
instrument specifications 333 interface commands 243
STATe
instrument state IP address 131
CATalog? command 236
recall power-down state 236 ip address 243
DELete command 235
instrument state storage 119, 233 port usage 246
reset 129 NAME command 235
naming 120
setting address 47 RECall
power-down recall 119
instrument states sockets 246 AUTO command 236
naming from front panel 45 subnet mask 132 VALid? command 236
storing from front-panel 45 LAN configuration 46, 128 menu
instrument stored states language quick reference 33
default names 235 SCPI overview 265 menu operation 31
deleting from memory. 235 language, help system 28 message
integer download, arbs 225 last ip address 244 calibration 142, 264
interface LCD display 4 message available (MAV) 254
web 136 bulb-saver mode 123 messages
interface (bus) trigger 108 leakage errors 315 error 271
interface configuration 46, 128 learn string 240 modulation 36
interface errors 122, 237 linear interpolation 114 AM 72
internal trigger 107, 208, 216, 219 linear sweep 207 FM 77
interpolation 114 load 35, 61 PWM 84
load impedance 321 tutorial description 326
invert waveform 65
modulation depth (AM) 75, 191,
IP address 48, 131 effect on amplitude 61
load termination 35 327
dot notation 50
effect on amplitude 61 modulation depth, percent modulation
further information 50
local language, help 28 36
local operation (LAN) 242 Modulation In connector 76, 83, 89
343
Index
modulation source output polarity 65

AM 76 connector 64 overheating 30
FM 83 enable/disable 64, 180 overload, output 180
PWM 89 polarity 65 overload, voltage 64
output amplitude overview
N arb waveform limitations 57, 165, display 4
name 175 front panel 3
arbitrary waveforms 117 dBm limitations 174 front-panel menus 33
defaults for stored states 235 front-panel selection 18 number entry 5
stored states 120, 235 high / low level 175 product 2
naming stored states load limitations 56, 164, 174 programming 160
offset limitations 56, 174 rear panel 6
range hold 64
narrowband FM 327
tutorial description 320 P
n-cycle burst 104 unit limitations 56
negative ramp waveform 223 units 60 parameter types 269
Index
negative trigger slope 209, 217, 220 OUTPut command 180 password, calibration 139
netbios 245 Output connector 180 peak frequency deviation (FM) 82,
new line 268 output frequency 195
noise 169 burst limitations 55 peak voltage 323
number entry 5 duty cycle limitations 55, 173 peak-to-peak voltage 323
number keypad 5 front-panel selection 17 percent modulation (AM) 75, 191,
number of cycles, burst 214 function limitations 55, 163, 173 327
number of errors allowed 237 output function period
numeric entry 5 allowed with modulation 53 burst mode 102
nyquist sampling theorem 313 amplitude limitations 54 front-panel selection 17
frequency limitations 54 pulse waveform 68
modulation modes allowed 171 period, pulse 184
O
pulse period limitations 185 PHASe
offset output impedance 321 REFerence command 248
amplitude limitations 58, 166, effect on amplitude 61 UNLock:ERRor:STATe
176 output load 61 command 248
arb waveform limitations 59, 166, output overload 180 phase (burst) 103
176 output period PHASe command 137, 247
front-panel selection 20
front-panel selection 17 phase errors 319
load limitations 58, 166, 176
operation complete 241
output resistance 35 phase lock 137, 247
output termination 35, 61, 321 error on unlock 248
option 002 query
*OPT? 224, 241
effect on amplitude 61 phase offset 137, 247
OUTPut:TRIGger:SLOPe
output units 60 phase noise 319, 334
dBm limitation 183 phase offset
command 209, 218, 221
TRIGger command 209, 218, 221
output waveform phase lock 137, 247
344
Index
phase quantization errors 319 modulation waveshape 198 rear panel

phase units overview 197 connectors 6
burst phase 216 pulse waveform 85 overview 6
phase, burst 215 width deviation 87, 199 recalling stored state 234
point interpolation 114 PWM 84 reference, external 137, 247
polarity 65 DEViation register diagram, status registers 249
polarity, trigger 209, 217, 220 DCYCle command 200 registers, status 249
polarity, waveform 65 DEViation command 199 remote (bus) trigger 108
duty cycle deviation 88, 200 remote errors 122, 237
ports, LAN 246
INTernal
positive trigger slope 209, 217, 220 FREQuency command 199
"data out of range" errors 285
power connector 6 "settings conflict" errors 276
FUNCtion command 198 arbitrary waveform errors 297
power cord 15 modulating frequency 199
power switch 15 calibration errors 296
modulating source 89, 198 execution errors 276
power-down recall 119, 236 modulating waveform 86 instrument errors 293
Index
product dimensions 338 modulation source 89 query errors 292
product overview 2 modulation waveshape 198 self-test errors 294
product specifications 333 overview 197 remote interface
programming commands 145 pulse waveform 85 command reference 145
programming examples 299 SOURce command 198 command summary 147
programming overview 160 STATe command 202 configuration 46, 128
width deviation 87, 199 remote trigger 220
PULSe
PWM commands 198
PERiod command 184 remote/local state 242
pulse remove arb waveforms 231
Q
front-panel configuration 24 remove stored state 235
pulse duty cycle quantization errors 319 reset 35, 239
definition 187 questionable data register LAN 129
pulse edge time 71 bit definitions 255 resistance, load 35, 321
pulse period 184 commands 260 revision, firmware 127
function limitations 185 operation 255 RMS voltage 323
pulse waveform queue, error 122, 237
root-mean-square 323
edge time 188 quick reference, commands 147
rubber bumpers, removing 29
pulse period 68 quick start 13
tutorial description 316 S
pulse width 24, 69, 70, 186 R
definition 184, 186 SCPI
rack mounting kits 30
pulse width modulation 84 command terminators 268
radians 215 language overview 265
duty cycle deviation 88, 200 ramp waveform
modulating frequency 199 parameter types 269
symmetry 63, 180 SCPI command reference 145
modulating source 89, 198 range hold 178, 320
modulating waveform 86 SCPI command summary 147
range hold, amplitude 64
345
Index
SCPI status system 249 specifications 333 stored states 119, 233
SCPI version 127, 240 spurs 319 default names 235
screen 4 square wave deleting from memory 235
displaying message 125, 239 duty cycle 62, 179 front-panel operation 45
number format 126 duty cycle selection 23 naming 120
screen blank 123 tutorial description 316 naming from front panel 45
screen contrast 124 SRQ 253 power-down recall 119
screen enable / disable 125, 238 standard event register strings
screen saver mode 123 bit definitions 257 error 271
commands 261 subnet mask 132
security
operation 257 support, technical 7
calibration 139
self test 124, 240 start frequency, sweep 205 swapped byte order 227
self-test starting phase, burst 103, 215 SWEep
error messages 294 state storage 119, 233 SPACing command 207
serial poll 253 front-panel operation 45 STATe command 207
Index
naming 120 TIME command 207

service request (SRQ) 253
naming from front panel 45 sweep 90, 329
setting address
naming location 235 center frequency 92, 206
LAN 47 external trigger source 110
power-down recall 119
settings frequency span 92, 206
STATus
default 143 front-panel operation 38, 40
PRESet command 262
shipping contents 15 linear vs. logarithmic 93, 207,
QUEStionable
shock hazard 6 CONDition? command 260 329
signal imperfections 318 ENABle command 260 marker frequency 94, 210
sin(x)/x waveform 223 QUEStionable? command 260 overview 203
sinc waveform 223 status byte register spacing 93
sinewave spectral purity 334 start frequency 91, 205
bit definitions 251
slope (trigger) stop frequency 91, 205
commands 259
trigger input 209 , 217, 220 sweep time 93, 207
operation 251
trigger output 209, 217, 220 Sync signal 91
status registers 249
slope, trigger 209, 217, 220 trigger out signal 96
condition register 249 trigger output 111
burst 104 enable register 249 trigger source 95
sweep 95 event register 249 sweeps
sockets questionable data register 255
Sync signal 92
LAN 246 register diagram 249
symmetry 63
softkey labels 4 standard event register 257
symmetry definition 63, 180
software (bus) trigger 108, 208, status byte register 251
Sync connector 210
216, 219 status system 249
stop frequency, sweep 205 sync signal 330
software revision 127
stored state enable/disable 67
software, connectivity 15
recall power-down state 236 for all waveform functions 66
sound (beeper) 123 Sync connector 66
346
Index
syntax, SCPI commands 147 termination, load 321 internal source 107
SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe terminators, command 268 manual source 107
command 240 test 124, 240 software (bus) source 108
BEEPer command 240, 241 text message sweep 96
COMMunicate calibration 142, 264 Trig In connector 110
GPIB:ADDRess command 242 The 87, 88 Trig Out connector 111
LAN:AUTOip command 243 trigger sources 106, 208, 216,
time, sweep 207
219
IPADdress command 243, timebase, external 137, 247 tutorial 309
244 tone
LIPaddress? command 244 enable / disable 240, 241 U
MAC? command 244 transition time, pulse 188
MEDiasense command 244 translated language, help system 28 UNIT
NETBios command 245 Trig In connector 110 ANGLe command 248
units
TELNet Trig Out connector 111, 209, 218,
amplitude 60
PROMpt command 245 221
Index
as part of command 183
WMESsaget command 246 TRIGger burst phase 216
RLSTate command 242 SLOPe command 209, 217 , 220 converting voltage 19
ERRor? command 237 SOURce command 208, 216, 219 voltage 164
LOCal command 242 trigger USB
REMote command 242 burst 104 configuration 46, 128
RWLock command 242 bus (software) 216, 219 connector 6
VERSion? command 240 external 208, 216, 219 USB Configuration 136
system error 122, 237 immediate (internal) 208, 216,
219
V
T software (bus) 208
source 208 version, SCPI 127, 240
technical support 7 VOLTage
sweep 95
telnet message 246 trigger out signal (burst) 105 HIGH command 177
telnet prompt 245 trigger out signal (sweep) 96 HIGH? command 177
temperature overload 30 TRIGger command 220 LOW command 177
terminal trigger output signal 209, 218, 221 LOW? command 177
10 MHz In 137, 247 trigger slope 209, 217 , 220 OFFSet command 176
10 MHz Out 137, 247 burst 104 OFFSet? command 176
Modulation In 76, 83, 89 sweep 95 RANGe
Output 180 trigger input 209, 217, 220 AUTO command 178
Sync Output 66 trigger output 209, 217, 220 AUTO? command 178
Sync output 210 triggered burst mode 331 UNIT command 183
Trig In 110 triggering voltage autorange 64, 178, 320
Trig Out 111, 209, 218, 221 VOLTage command 174
burst 105
termination 35, 61 voltage overload 64
external source 108
effect on amplitude 61 front-panel operation 44 voltage units 60, 164, 183
347
Index
converting 19
VOLTage? command 174
vpp 60, 183
vrms 60, 183
W
waveform imperfections 318
waveform invert 65
waveform output
connector 64
enable/disable 64, 180
polarity 65
waveform polarity 65
waveform tutorial 309
waveforms
Index
point interpolation 114

web
interface 136
wideband FM 327
width, pulse
definition 186
Z
zero-phase reference 248
348

Agilent 33210A Audio Analyzer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Agilent 33210A Audio Analyzer

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Agilent 33210A Audio Analyzer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

33210A users guide.

book Page 1 Wednesday, July 16, 2008 11:16 AM

Publication Number 33210-90001 (order as 33210-90000 manual set)

Copyright © 2008 Agilent Technologies, Inc.

Agilent 33210A at a Glance

The Agilent Technologies 33210A is a 10 MHz synthesized function

Convenient bench-top features

• Built-in 14-bit 50 MSa/s waveform capability

• Precise pulse waveform capabilities with adjustable edge time

• LCD display provides numeric and graphical views

• Easy-to-use knob and numeric keypad

• Instrument state storage with user-defined names

• Portable, ruggedized case with non-skid feet

Flexible system features

• Four optional downloadable 8K-point arbitrary waveform memories

• GPIB (IEEE-488), USB, and LAN remote interfaces are standard

• LXI Class C Compliant

• SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) compatibility

The Front Panel at a Glance

1 Graph Mode/ Local Key 9 Manual Trigger Key (used for

Note: To get context-sensitive help on any front-panel key or menu softkey,

The Front-Panel Display at a Glance

Mode Trigger Output

To enter or exit the Graph Mode, press the key.

In Graph Mode, only one parameter label

Front-Panel Number Entry

1. Key in a value as you would on a typical calculator.

The Rear Panel at a Glance

1 External 10 MHz Reference Input Terminal 5 USB Interface Connector

Use the menu to:

Note: The External and Internal 10 MHz Reference Terminals (1 and 2,

Front-Panel Menu Operation Chapter 2 introduces you to the front-

Features and Functions Chapter 3 gives a detailed description of the

Remote Interface Reference Chapter 4 contains reference information

Application Programs Chapter 6 contains several remote interface

Tutorial Chapter 7 discusses the fundamentals of signal generation

Specifications Chapter 8 lists the function generator’s specifications.

You can contact Agilent Technologies at one of the following telephone

In the United States: (800) 829-4444

In Europe: 31 20 547 2111

Chapter 1 Quick Start 13

Chapter 3 Features and Functions 51

Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference 145

Chapter 5 Error Messages 271

Chapter 6 Application Programs 299

Chapter 8 Specifications 333

• To Prepare the Function Generator for Use on page 15

Chapter 1 Quick Start

• Power cord (for country of destination).

• Agilent 33210A Product Reference CD (product software,

• Agilent Automation-Ready CD (Agilent IO Libraries Suite).

• USB 2.0 cable.

Chapter 1 Quick Start

Chapter 1 Quick Start

1 Press the “Freq” softkey. 4

2 Enter the magnitude of the desired frequency.

3 Select the desired units.

Chapter 1 Quick Start

1 Press the “Ampl” softkey.

2 Enter the magnitude of the desired amplitude.